WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual
that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without
imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-247-9753 (U.S.)
or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and
Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian
residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................8
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE .................................................................................10
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................72
4SAFETY ..........................................................................................................................................90
5STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................137
6IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .....................................................................................................186
7SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................214
8TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................254
9MULTIMEDIA ..............................................................................................................................262
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................288
11INDEX.............................................................................................................................................292
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL....................................9
Essential Information.........................................9
Symbols...............................................................9
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...................................9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.............9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED ................ 10
KEYS ....................................................................... 11
Key Fob .............................................................11
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 15
Keyless Push Button Ignition...........................15
Vehicle On Message ........................................17
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .......................... 17
How To Use Remote Start —
If Equipped........................................................17
Remote Start Abort Message On
The Instrument Cluster Display —
If Equipped........................................................18
To Enter Remote Start Mode...........................18
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle ......................................................18
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle...............................................................19
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped........................................................19
General Information.........................................19
SENTRY KEY............................................................20
Key Programming ............................................20
Replacement Keys ...........................................20
General Information.........................................21
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED ......21
To Arm The System ..........................................21
To Disarm The System.....................................22
Rearming Of The System .................................22
Tamper Alert .....................................................22
DOORS ....................................................................22
Manual Door Locks ..........................................22
Power Door Locks ...........................................23
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry ..............23
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit......................26
Automatic Door Locks —
If Equipped........................................................26
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors .......................................................26
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED.....27
Programming The Memory Feature ................27
Linking And Unlinking The Remote
Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory..................28
Memory Position Recall ...................................28
SEATS .....................................................................28
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)....................28
Power Seats .....................................................29
Heated Seats — If Equipped............................31
Front Ventilated Seats —
If Equipped .......................................................33
HEAD RESTRAINTS................................................ 33
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats .......33
Rear Head Restraints .....................................34
Front Head Restraint Removal........................35
STEERING WHEEL.................................................. 35
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped ......................................................35
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped ......................................................35
Heated Steering Wheel —
If Equipped ......................................................36
MIRRORS ............................................................... 37
Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped ......................................................37
Outside Mirrors.................................................37
Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped.........................................37
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And
Approach Lighting —
If Equipped .......................................................37
Power Mirrors ...................................................38
Power Folding Outside Mirrors —
If Equipped .......................................................38
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .........................39
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse —
If Equipped .......................................................39
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors —
If Equipped ......................................................39
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................. 40
Multifunction Lever ..........................................40
Headlight Switch...............................................40
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs).......................41
High/Low Beam Switch....................................41
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped .............41
Flash-To-Pass....................................................41
Automatic Headlights ......................................42
Parking Lights ..................................................42
Headlights On With Wipers..............................42
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity
Discharge Headlights — If Equipped ...............42
Headlight Time Delay ......................................42
Lights-On Reminder .........................................42
Fog Lights — If Equipped..................................43
Turn Signals .....................................................43
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..................43
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................. 43
Courtesy Lights.................................................43
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .............. 45
Wiper Operation ...............................................45
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ...............46
CLIMATE CONTROLS ............................................ 47
Automatic Climate Control Overview...............47
Climate Control Functions ...............................51
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...........52
Operating Tips .................................................52
WINDOWS ..............................................................53
Power Window Controls ...................................53
Wind Buffeting .................................................55
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .............55
Opening Sunroof ..............................................56
Closing Sunroof ................................................56
Wind Buffeting .................................................56
Opening Power Shade......................................56
Closing Power Shade .......................................57
Pinch Protect Feature ......................................57
Sunroof Maintenance ......................................57
Ignition Off Operation.......................................57
HOOD .......................................................................58
To Open The Hood ...........................................58
To Close The Hood ...........................................58
TRUNK......................................................................58
Opening.............................................................58
Closing ..............................................................59
Trunk Safety .....................................................60
Cargo Area Features .......................................60
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .........62
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED ..........62
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®.......................................................62
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .........64
Using HomeLink® ............................................65
Security .............................................................65
Troubleshooting Tips........................................65
General Information.........................................66
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ......................................... 66
Storage .............................................................66
Cupholders ......................................................68
Power Sunshade — If Equipped ......................69
Electrical Power Outlets...................................70
Sunglasses Bin Door .......................................71
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ........................................ 72
Instrument Cluster Descriptions ....................74
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ........................ 74
Location And Controls......................................75
Engine Oil Life Reset .......................................76
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Menu Items ......................................................76
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped .....................................79
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................... 80
Red Warning Lights..........................................80
Yellow Warning Lights......................................83
Yellow Indicator Lights.....................................86
Green Indicator Lights .....................................86
White Indicator Lights......................................87
Blue Indicator Lights........................................88
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ....... 88
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity ......................................88
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ............................................................ 89
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ................................................ 90
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................90
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ..........91
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ............................ 97
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped........................................................97
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation -
If Equipped..................................................... 101
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .... 103
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ....................107
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 107
Important Safety Precautions....................... 108
Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 108
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 114
Child Restraints ............................................. 122
Transporting Pets ......................................... 133
SAFETY TIPS ....................................................... 133
Transporting Passengers.............................. 133
Exhaust Gas................................................... 134
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................... 134
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................................... 136
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ..................................... 137
Automatic Transmission .............................. 137
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition ...................... 137
Normal Starting ............................................ 137
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ............................ 139
If Engine Fails To Start.................................. 139
After Starting ................................................. 140
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ........ 140
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ........ 140
PARKING BRAKE................................................. 140
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION............................. 142
Ignition Park Interlock................................... 143
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System .......................................................... 143
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission.......... 143
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED ........................... 149
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................ 149
POWER STEERING...............................................149
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED......................150
To Activate ..................................................... 150
To Set A Desired Speed ............................... 150
To Vary The Speed Setting .......................... 151
To Accelerate For Passing ........................... 151
To Resume Speed ........................................ 151
To Deactivate ............................................... 152
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................152
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation .... 153
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)..... 153
To Activate/Deactivate ................................. 154
To Set A Desired ACC Speed ........................ 154
To Cancel ....................................................... 154
To Turn Off..................................................... 155
To Resume..................................................... 155
To Vary The ACC Speed................................. 155
Setting The Following Distance In ACC........ 156
Overtake Aid .................................................. 157
ACC Operation At Stop .................................. 158
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu ........... 158
Display Warnings And Maintenance............ 158
Precautions While Driving With ACC ............ 160
General Information...................................... 162
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode.............................................................. 162
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED .......................................164
ParkSense Sensors....................................... 164
ParkSense Warning Display.......................... 165
ParkSense Display ........................................ 165
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense.............. 168
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System ........................................................... 169
Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 169
ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 169
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............................170
LaneSense Operation ................................... 170
Turning LaneSense On Or Off....................... 171
LaneSense Warning Message...................... 171
Changing LaneSense Status ........................ 173
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ...............173
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...................................174
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release ............ 175
VEHICLE LOADING ..............................................176
Vehicle Certification Label............................ 176
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)........... 176
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ............... 176
Overloading.................................................... 176
Loading ......................................................... 177
TRAILER TOWING................................................ 177
Common Towing Definitions......................... 177
Trailer Hitch Classification............................ 179
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) .............. 179
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................... 180
Towing Requirements ................................... 180
Towing Tips ................................................... 182
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) ........................... 183
DRIVING TIPS....................................................... 183
Driving On Slippery Surfaces........................ 183
Driving Through Water ................................. 184
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ........................ 186
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED ..... 186
General Information...................................... 190
BULB REPLACEMENT ......................................... 191
Replacement Bulbs....................................... 191
Replacing Exterior Bulbs............................... 193
FUSES....................................................................195
General Information...................................... 195
Underhood Fuses.......................................... 195
Rear Interior Fuses ....................................... 198
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING .........................202
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage .............. 202
Preparations For Jacking ............................. 203
Jacking And Changing A Tire ....................... 204
Road Tire Installation.................................... 206
JUMP STARTING .................................................207
Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 207
Jump Starting Procedure.............................. 208
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY –
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................209
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...........................209
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ..................................210
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ...............................211
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE..........................212
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models...................... 213
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models ................ 213
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) ...................................................213
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).........................213
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ....................................214
Maintenance Plan ......................................... 215
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................218
3.6L Engine ................................................... 218
5.7L Engine ................................................... 219
Checking Oil Level ........................................ 220
Adding Washer Fluid ..................................... 220
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 220
Pressure Washing ......................................... 221
DEALER SERVICE ................................................221
Engine Oil ...................................................... 221
Engine Oil Filter ............................................. 223
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .............................. 223
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................... 223
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ................... 225
Body Lubrication............................................ 226
Windshield Wiper Blades.............................. 226
Exhaust System............................................. 227
Cooling System ............................................. 229
Brake System ............................................... 231
Automatic Transmission .............................. 232
All Wheel Drive (AWD) —
If Equipped .................................................... 233
Rear Axle........................................................ 233
RAISING THE VEHICLE........................................ 233
TIRES..................................................................... 234
Tire Safety Information ................................ 234
Tires — General Information ........................ 242
Tire Types....................................................... 245
Spare Tires — If Equipped............................. 246
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ........................ 248
Tire Chains and Traction Devices................. 249
Tire Rotation Recommendations ................ 249
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ................... 250
Treadwear...................................................... 250
Traction Grades............................................. 250
Temperature Grades..................................... 250
VEHICLE STORAGE.............................................. 251
BODYWORK ......................................................... 251
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 251
Body And Underbody Maintenance.............. 251
Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 252
INTERIORS .......................................................... 252
Seats And Fabric Parts ................................. 252
Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 253
Leather Parts................................................. 253
Glass Surfaces ............................................. 253
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA ........................................254
Vehicle Identification Number...................... 254
BRAKE SYSTEM ..................................................254
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS..................................................254
Torque Specifications ................................... 254
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ........................................255
3.6L Engine ................................................... 255
5.7L Engine ................................................... 256
Reformulated Gasoline ................................ 256
Materials Added To Fuel............................... 256
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends......................... 256
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles ......................................................... 257
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications...... 257
MMT In Gasoline ........................................... 257
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 258
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ......................... 258
FLUID CAPACITIES ..............................................259
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS..................................260
Engine ............................................................ 260
Chassis .......................................................... 261
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .........................................262
CYBERSECURITY .................................................262
UCONNECT SETTINGS ........................................263
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings .................... 263
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ..............280
Radio Operation ............................................ 280
Media Mode................................................... 280
AUX/USB CONTROL.............................................280
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES......281
Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 281
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS ..........................................................282
Introducing Uconnect.................................... 282
Get Started .................................................... 282
Basic Voice Commands ................................ 283
Radio .............................................................. 283
Media ............................................................. 284
Phone ............................................................. 284
Voice Text Reply ............................................ 284
Climate........................................................... 285
Navigation (4C NAV)...................................... 285
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped ..................... 285
Do Not Disturb .............................................. 285
Android Auto™ — If Equipped ...................... 286
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped ..................... 286
General Information...................................... 287
Additional Information .................................. 287
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................... 288
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 288
Prepare A List ................................................ 288
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 288
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................ 288
FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 288
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center............... 288
In Mexico Contact.......................................... 289
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands................ 289
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)......................... 289
Service Contract ........................................... 289
WARRANTY INFORMATION................................290
MOPAR PARTS.....................................................290
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................290
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C............................................ 290
In Canada ...................................................... 291
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................291
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This Owner's
Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as
well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your
vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation
of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information which is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner’s Information, that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this
publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this
reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized
dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that the authorized dealers know your vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and care
about your satisfaction.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
ESSENTIAL INFORMATION
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the
information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment
ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's
equipment.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete
listing of all subjects.
SYMBOLS
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate
precautions to be observed when using this component. Refer to “Warning
Lights and Messages” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains
WARNINGS against operating procedures that
could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains
CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not
read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information. Observe
all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
1
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right through your
Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen system
(if equipped).
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your Uconnect
Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect
Apps button.
From there, press the
Vehicle User Guide icon on
your touchscreen. No Uconnect registration is
required.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User
Guide Touchscreen Icon
NOTE:
Vehicle User Guide features are not available while
the vehicle is moving. If you try to access while the
vehicle is in motion, the system will display the
message “Feature not available while the vehicle
is in motion”.
Pre-Installed Features
Your User Guide — Updated in real-time
Touchscreen convenience
Maintenance schedules and information
Comprehensive icon and symbol glossary
Available when and where you need it
Customizable interface
Multilingual
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will
be able to explore your warranty information and
radio manual when and where you need them.
Your Uconnect system displays the Vehicle User
Guide on your touchscreen radio to assist in better
understanding your vehicle. There’s no app to
download, no phone to connect and no external
device needed for playback. Plus, it’s updated
throughout the year, in real-time, so it is never out
of date.
Features/Benefits
Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen
radio
Enhanced search and browsing capability
Robust NAV application (if equipped)
Add selected topics to a fast-access Favorites
category
Icon and symbol glossary
Warranty information
Crucial driver information and assistance:
Operating Instructions
Warranty Information
Fluid Level Standards
Maintenance Schedules
Emergency Procedures
911 Contact and More
TIP:
When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it to
your Favorites, for easy access in the future.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 11
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The
ignition system consists of a key fob with Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/STOP push
button ignition system. The Remote Keyless Entry
system consists of a key fob and Keyless
Enter-N-Go feature (if equipped).
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found by the RKE system if
it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other
electronic device; these devices may block the key
fob’s wireless signal.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors
and trunk from distances up to approximately
66 feet (20 m). The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE:
In the ON/RUN position, key fob commands are
disabled if the vehicle speed is at or above
2 mph (4 km/h).
Key Fob
The key fob also contains an emergency key, which
is stored in the rear of the key fob.
Emergency Key
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob
become depleted. The emergency key is also for
locking/unlocking the glove compartment. You can
keep the emergency key with you when valet
parking.
1 — Unlock
2 — Trunk Open
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — Panic Button
6 — Emergency Key
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the emergency key, slide the
mechanical release button on the back of the key
fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key
out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal Process
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be
verified by referring to the instrument cluster,
which will display directions to follow.
NOTE:
In a situation of a low or fully depleted battery, a
backup method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob
(side opposite of the emergency key) against the
START/STOP ignition button and push to operate
the ignition switch.
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver's door or twice within five
seconds to unlock all doors.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the
unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will
also be activated.
NOTE:
All door unlock settings can be programmed to
your convenience through Uconnect Settings.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Unlock the driver door on the first push of the
key fob unlock button.
Unlock all doors on the first push of the key fob
unlock button.
NOTE:
To unlock doors and trunk with passive entry, Refer
to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Doors”
in this chapter for further information.
NOTE:
When you use the key fob to open any door, the
courtesy lights, overhead lights, and approach
lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped) will turn
on. Refer to “Interior Lights” in this chapter for
further information.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock
either the driver's door or all doors on the first push
of the unlock button on the key fob.
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Flash Lights With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash
when the doors are locked with the key fob. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to
90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the
key fob. The time for this feature is programmable,
on vehicles equipped, through Uconnect Settings.
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Push the trunk button on the key fob two times
within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer
to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Doors”
in this chapter for further information.
1 — Mechanical Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
To Lock The Doors And Trunk
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to
lock all doors.
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will
chirp to acknowledge the signal if programmed.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further programmable information.
NOTE:
To lock the doors with passive entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Doors” in
this chapter for further information.
If one or more doors are open, or the trunk is open,
the doors will lock. The doors will unlock
automatically if the key fob is left inside the
passenger compartment, otherwise the doors will
stay locked.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the
doors are locked with the key fob. This feature can
be turned on or turned off. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push the
Panic button on the key fob. When the Panic Alarm
is activated, the turn signals will flash, the horn will
pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes
unless you turn it off by either pushing the Panic
button a second time or drive the vehicle at a
speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
The interior lights will turn off if you place the
ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior
lights and horn will remain on.
You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from
the vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises
emitted by the system.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one
CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the
mechanical latch on the back of the key fob
sideways with your thumb and then pull the
emergency key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Separate the key fob halves using the tip of the
emergency key, a #2 flat blade screwdriver, or
a coin and gently pry the two halves of the key
fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
Separating Case With A Coin
NOTE:
Separating the case can also be done with a key
blade or a flat head screwdriver.
Separating Case With A Key Blade
Separating Case With A Flat Blade Screwdriver
Key Fob Battery Replacement
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover
over (battery facing downward) and tapping it
lightly on a solid surface such as a table or
similar surface, and then replace the battery.
When replacing the battery, match the (+) sign
on the battery to the (+) sign on the inside of
the battery clip, located on the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your
fingers because skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Request For Additional Remote Controls
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle,
it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never
been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS PUSH BUTTON IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition with the push of a button as long as the
key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four
operating positions, three of which are labeled and
will illuminate when in position. The three positions
are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is
START. During START, RUN will illuminate.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF mode.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or depleted
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be
used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose
side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
key fob against the START/STOP ignition button
and push to operate the ignition switch.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking,
alarm, etc.) are still available.
ACC
Engine is not started.
Some electrical devices are available.
ON/RUN
Driving position.
All the electrical devices are available.
START
The engine will start.
NOTE:
Refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And
Operating" for further information.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
(Continued)
VEHICLE ON MESSAGE
When opening the driver's door and the ignition is
in the ON/RUN (engine not running) position, a
chime will sound to remind you to place the ignition
in the OFF position.
In addition to the chime, the Vehicle On message
will display in the cluster (if equipped).
NOTE:
The power window switches and power sunroof (if
equipped) will remain active for three minutes
after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
The timing for this feature is programmable.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
HOW TO USE REMOTE START —
I
F EQUIPPED
Push remote start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. Pushing the
remote start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and
push the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
With remote start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
The vehicle must be started using the START/
STOP ignition button after two consecutive time-
outs.
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Trunk closed
Hazard switch off
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic trans-
mission into PARK, apply the parking brake,
place the engine in the OFF position, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle. If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
always make sure the keyless ignition is in
“OFF” position, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous remote start
event
Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
Ignition in STOP/OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle security alarm is not signaling an intru-
sion
Malfunction indicator is not illuminated
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE ON
T
HE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY —
I
F EQUIPPED
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
TO ENTER REMOTE START MODE
Push and release the remote start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
the vehicle will start and then shut down in
10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power sunroof
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The engine can be started two consecutive
times with the key fob. However, the ignition
must be cycled by pushing the START/STOP igni-
tion button twice (or the ignition switch must be
placed in the ON/RUN position) before you can
repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
W
ITHOUT DRIVING THE VEHICLE
Push and release the remote start button one time
or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute
cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
remote start request.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide which is odorless and color-
less. Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can
cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start System, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE AND
D
RIVE THE VEHICLE
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and
release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock
the doors and disarm the vehicle security alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute
cycle, push and release the START/STOP ignition
button.
NOTE:
For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position in order
to drive the vehicle.
For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Insert Key and
Turn To Run” will show in the instrument cluster
display until you insert the key.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will show in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP ignition
button.
To Cancel Remote Start
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the
following occur:
The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds
2500 RPM.
Any engine warning lights come on.
Low Fuel Light turns on.
The hood is opened.
The hazard switch is pushed.
The gear selector is moved out of PARK.
The brake pedal is pushed.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When remote start is activated, the heated
steering wheel and driver heated seat features will
automatically turn on in cold weather. In warm
weather, the driver vented seat feature will
automatically turn on when the remote start is
activated. These features will stay on through the
duration of remote start or until the ignition switch
is placed in the ON/RUN position.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed or
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from
another vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains
on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates
that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob
is used to start the engine but there is an issue
with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start
and shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible by an authorized
dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
KEY PROGRAMMING
Programming key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
REPLACEMENT KEYS
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle,
it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE:
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle elec-
tronics. A blank key fob is one that has never been
programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF position.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the keyless push
button ignition for unauthorized operation. While
the vehicle security alarm is armed, interior
switches for door locks and trunk release are
disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
vehicle security alarm will provide the following
audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the
parking lights and/or turn signals will flash, and
the vehicle security light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in
the OFF position. Refer to "Ignition Switch" in
this chapter for further information.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob avail-
able in the same exterior zone (refer to
"Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry," in
“Doors” in this chapter for further
information).
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock
the doors using the manual door lock.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using
any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grasp the Passive Entry door handle, if
equipped. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry” in “Doors” in this chapter for
further information.
Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go ignition button
(requires at least one valid key fob in the
vehicle).
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock
the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has
occurred, the vehicle security alarm will arm
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not.
If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle
security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle
security alarm will remain armed when the battery
is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, the
horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle
security alarm.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will
turn the horn off after 29 seconds, five seconds
between cycles, up to eight cycles if the trigger
remains active and the vehicle security alarm will
rearm itself.
TAMPER ALERT
If something has triggered the vehicle security
alarm in your absence, the horn will sound three
times and the exterior lights will blink three times
when you disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Check the vehicle for tampering.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock the front
doors, pull the inside door handle to the first
detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock
knob on the door trim panel upward.
Door Lock Knob
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the
door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the
key fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the
door.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
POWER DOOR LOCKS
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switches
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with
the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry system.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in
this section for further information.
If you push the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate.
This prevents you from accidentally locking the key
fob in the vehicle. Placing the ignition in the OFF
position or closing the door will allow the locks to
operate. If the driver door is open, and the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime will
sound as a reminder to remove the key fob.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows
you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without
having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on or off.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door
handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and arm the security alarm
(if equipped).
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle Passive Entry system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other elec-
tronic device; these devices may block the key
fob’s wireless signal and prevent the passive
entry handle from locking/unlocking the
vehicle.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event
of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you
drive as well as when you park and leave the
vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock
your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Driver's Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the front
driver door handle to unlock the driver's door
automatically. The interior door panel lock knob
will raise when the door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door
handle, depending on the selected setting in the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the
front passenger door handle to unlock all four
doors automatically. The interior door panel lock
knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger door
handle is grabbed, regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key Fob In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle,
the Passive Entry system is equipped with an
automatic door unlock feature which will function if
the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive
entry. There are three situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any passive entry vehicle.
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open
doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be
executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob inside
the car and it does not find any Passive Entry key
fobs outside the vehicle, then the vehicle will
unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry key fob is
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not
unlock the doors when any of the following condi-
tions are true:
The doors are locked manually using the door
lock knobs.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then the doors
are closed.
To Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the deck lid, push the button on the right
side of the Center High Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL), which is located on the deck lid.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
Trunk Passive Entry Button
NOTE:
If you inadvertently leave your vehicle's Passive
Entry key fob in the trunk and try to close the deck
lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
deck lid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front
door handles, push the door handle lock button to
lock all four doors.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door
handle. This is done to allow you to check if the
vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle,
without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
key fob battery is depleted.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the
key fob lock button or the lock button located on
the vehicle’s interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
enabled.
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h) and the
transmission is placed in PARK.
3. The driver door is opened.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in
accordance with local laws.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can
be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per
written request of the customer. Please see an
authorized dealer for service.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children
riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are
equipped with Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door
Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the
lock and rotate to the lock or unlock position.
3. Repeat steps one and two for the opposite rear
door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE:
For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged,
manually raise the door lock knob to the unlocked
position, open the window, and open the door
using the outside door handle.
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall through a
memory switch. Each memory profile saves
desired position settings for the following features:
Driver seat
Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (on/off)
(if equipped)
Side mirrors
Power tilt and telescopic steering column
(if equipped)
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each
can be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
Be sure to program the radio presets prior to
programming the memory settings.
The memory settings switch is located on the
driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists of
three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall
either of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
Memory Settings Buttons
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the
selected profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
position (do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt
and telescopic steering column [if equipped],
and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch, and then push the desired
memory button (1 or 2) within five seconds.
The instrument cluster display will display
which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be
opened from the outside with the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE REMOTE
K
EYLESS ENTRY KEY FOB TO MEMORY
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of
two saved memory profiles by pushing the unlock
button on the key fob.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must select
the “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature
through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
release the set (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release button
(1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set”
(1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked from your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, and within
10 seconds, pushing the unlock button on the key
fob.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two,
push the desired memory button number (1 or 2)
or the unlock button on the key fob linked to the
desired memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or by
pushing any of the seat adjustment switches.
When a recall is canceled, the driver's seat and
power tilt and telescopic steering column
(if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second
will occur before another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System
of the vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to
provide an additional storage area. To fold the rear
seatback, pull on the loops located on the upper
seatback.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
NOTE:
These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
Rear Seatback Loop
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded
forward.
Folded Rear Seatback
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are
left folded for an extended period of time. This is
normal and by simply unfolding the seats to the
open position, over time the seat cushion will
return to its normal shape.
When the seatback is folded to the upright
position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling
on the top of the seatback above the seat strap.
POWER SEATS
On models equipped with power seats, the
switches are located on the outboard side of the
seat near the floor. Use these switches to move the
driver’s seat up, down, forward, rearward or to
recline the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position, the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with
the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded
down position) should not be used as a play
area by children when the vehicle is in motion.
They could be seriously injured in a collision.
Children should be seated and using the
proper restraint system.
1 — Seatback Control (If Equipped)
2 — Seat Control
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or
rearward. The seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat
switch; the seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward
or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or
rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up
or down. Pull upward or push downward on the
front of the seat switch. The front of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has
been reached.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
WARNING!
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger
seats may also be equipped with power lumbar.
The power lumbar switch is located on the
outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch
forward or rearward to increase or decrease the
lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat
position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches
(67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will
return to its previously set position when you
place the vehicle’s ignition in the ACC or RUN
position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 of
an inch (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At
this position, there is no benefit to the driver by
moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an
associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled)
through the programmable features in the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia”.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions
and seat backs.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seat control buttons are located
within the climate or controls screen of the
touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings.
The indicator arrows in touchscreen buttons
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
arrows will illuminate for HI, and one for LO.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Turning the heating elements off will return the
user to the radio screen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second time
to turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time to
turn the heating elements off.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous
operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level
setting will turn off automatically after
approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programmed to come on
during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two rear outboard seats may
be equipped with heated seats. There are two
heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently.
The heated seat switches for each heater are
located on the rear of the center console.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the
level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will
illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for OFF.
Push the heated seat button once to turn the
HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second time
to turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time to
turn the heating elements off.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater
will provide a boosted heat level during the first
four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output
will drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-level
setting is selected, the system will automatically
switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes
of continuous operation. At that time, the number
of indicator lights changes from two to one,
indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn
off automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
(Continued)
FRONT VENTILATED SEATS —
I
F EQUIPPED
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans
that draw the air from the passenger compartment
and move air through fine perforations in the seat
cover to help keep the driver and front passenger
cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans
operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can gain
access to the control buttons through the climate
screen or the controls screen.
Press the ventilated seat button once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second
time to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a third time
to turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programmed to come on
during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
so that the top of the head restraint is located
above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of
your head.
REACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINTS — FRONT
S
EATS
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped
with Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event
of a rear impact, the RHR will automatically extend
forward minimizing the gap between the back of
the occupant’s head and the RHR.
The RHR will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the RHR do not
return to their normal position, see an authorized
dealer immediately.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
WARNING!
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
WARNING!
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button located at the base of the
head restraint and push downward on the head
restraint.
Front Head Restraint
REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS
The center head restraint has two adjustable
positions: up or down. When the center seat is
being occupied, the head restraint should be in the
raised position. When there are no occupants in
the center seat, the head restraint can be lowered
for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button located at the base of the
head restraint and push downward on the head
restraint.
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE:
The head restraint should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
If the center rear head restraint requires
removal, see an authorized dealer.
The outboard head restraints are not adjust-
able.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head restraints
in a location outside the occupant compart-
ment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the re-installation instructions above
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying
a seat.
Do not place items over the top of the Reac-
tive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These items
may interfere with the operation of the Reac-
tive Head Restraint in the event of a collision
and could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the re-installation instructions above prior
to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
FRONT HEAD RESTRAINT REMOVAL
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as
it can go. Then, push the adjustment button and
the release button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes. Then, adjust it to the appropriate height.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain addi-
tional clearance to the back of the head.
STEERING WHEEL
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The tilt/
telescoping lever is located below the steering
wheel at the end of the steering column.
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever
downward. To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the
steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired. To lock the steering column in position,
push the lever upward until fully engaged.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/
telescoping steering column switch is located
below the multifunction lever on the steering
column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Switch
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head restraints
in a location outside the occupant compart-
ment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the re-installation instructions above
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To tilt the steering column, move the switch up or
down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the switch toward you or
push the switch away from you as desired.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Settings, you can use your remote keyless entry
key fob or the memory switch on the driver's door
trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering
column to saved positions. Refer to “Driver
Memory Settings” in this chapter.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The
heated steering wheel has only one temperature
setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been
turned on, it will stay on for an average of
80 minutes before automatically shutting off.
This time will vary based on environmental
temperatures. The heated steering wheel can shut
off early or may not turn on when the steering
wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the Uconnect system. You can gain
access to the control button through the climate
screen or the controls screen.
Press the heated steering wheel button once
to turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to
come on during a remote start through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions must exercise care when using the
steering wheel heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or steering wheel covers of any type and mate-
rial. This may cause the steering wheel heater
to overheat.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
MIRRORS
AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRROR —
I
F EQUIPPED
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear
window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view
viewing.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on
or off through the touchscreen.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the
inside mirror.
NOTE:
The passenger side convex outside mirror will give
a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
DRIVER'S OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC
D
IMMING MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust
for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is
controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror
and will automatically adjust for headlight glare
when the inside mirror adjusts.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN SIGNAL
A
ND APPROACH LIGHTING —
I
F EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn
signal and approach lighting contain four LEDs,
which are located in the upper outer corner of each
mirror.
Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which
flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in
the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the
Hazard Warning flashers will also activate these
LEDs.
The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry lighting,
which turns on in both mirrors when you use the
remote keyless entry key fob or open any door. This
LED shines outward to illuminate the front and rear
door handles. It also shines downward to
illuminate the area in front of the doors.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on side
convex mirrors could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The illuminated entry lighting fades to off after
about 30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately
once the ignition is placed into the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
The approach lighting will not function when the
gear selector is moved out of the PARK position.
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror controls are located on the
driver's door trim panel.
Power Mirror Control
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select
buttons and a four-way mirror control switch.
To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R
(right) button to select the mirror that you want to
adjust.
NOTE:
A light in the select button will illuminate indicating
the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the
four arrows for the direction that you want the
mirror to move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be
controlled by the optional Memory Settings
Feature. Refer to “Driver Memory Settings” in this
chapter for further information.
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be
electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the
drive position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and
R (right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will
fold in, pushing the switch a second time will return
the mirrors to the normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically
cycled, a potential extra button push is required to
get the mirrors back to the drive position. If the
mirror does not electrically fold, check for ice or dirt
build up at the pivot area which can cause
excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Automatic Folding Mirrors
When the Automatic Folding Mirrors feature is
enabled, the exterior mirrors will fold in when
exiting the vehicle (with the ignition OFF, all doors
closed, and the doors are locked).
If the exterior mirrors were auto-folded, they
will unfold when the ignition is placed in the
ON position.
If the exterior mirrors were manually folded,
they will not automatically unfold.
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Right Mirror Selection
3 — Left Mirror Selection
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE:
The Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory. The
Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in "Multimedia" for
further information.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if
the following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded.
The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors, fold and unfold
them by pushing the button (this may require
multiple button pushes). This resets them to their
normal position.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate Controls”
in this chapter for further information.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE —
I
F EQUIPPED
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic
outside mirror positioning which will aid the
driver’s view of the ground rearward of the front
doors. The outside mirrors will move slightly
downward from the present position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE
position. Each stored memory setting will have an
associated Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse position.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt
Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun
visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor
downward and swing the mirror cover upward.
The light turns on automatically. Closing the mirror
cover turns off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Slide-On-Rod And Extender Features Of
Sun Visor
To use the Slide-On-Rod feature of the sun visor,
rotate the sun visor downward and swing the sun
visor so it is parallel to the side window, grab the
sun visor and pull rearwards until the sun visor is
in the desired position. To use the extender feature
of the sun visor, grab the extender which is located
at the rear of the visor and pull rearward.
Slide-On-Rod Feature
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever controls the operation of
the turn signals, headlight beam selection and
passing lights. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left
side of the instrument panel. This switch
controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights,
interior lights and fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light
and instrument panel light operation. Rotate the
headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light
operation.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Front Fog Light Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)
The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on
when the engine starts, headlights are off, and the
parking brake is off. The headlights must be used
for normal nighttime driving.
NOTE:
If allowed, by law, in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the DRLs can be turned
on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in "Multimedia" for further
information.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
may deactivate or reduce intensity on one side
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when
the hazard warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever away from you to
switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the
multifunction lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at night
by automating high beam control through the use
of a digital camera mounted to the windshield. This
camera detects vehicle specific light and
automatically switches from high beams to low
beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off by selecting “ON” under
“Auto Dim High Beams” within your Uconnect
settings, as well as turning the headlight switch
to the AUTO position. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield is replaced, the camera must be
re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See a
local authorized dealer.
To Activate
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO
headlight position.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you
(toward front of vehicle) to engage the high
beam mode.
NOTE:
This system will not activate until the vehicle is at
or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or
rearward in vehicle) to manually deactivate
the system (normal operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to
reactivate the system.
The Automatic High Beams can also be
deactivated through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
and remain on, until the lever is released.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
This system automatically turns the headlights on
or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the
system on, rotate the headlight switch
counterclockwise to the AUTO position. When the
system is on, the headlight time delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for
up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into
the OFF position. The headlight time delay can be
programmed 0/30/60/90 seconds.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
To turn the automatic system off, move the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
PARKING LIGHTS
Turn the headlight switch to the
first detent to turn the parking lights on.
This also turns on all instrument panel
lighting.
HEADLIGHTS ON WITH WIPERS
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn
on after the wipers are turned on if the headlight
switch is placed in the AUTO position and the
programmable feature is set to on. In addition, the
headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE:
The “Headlights With Wipers” feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
ADAPTIVE BI-XENON HIGH INTENSITY
D
ISCHARGE HEADLIGHTS —
I
F EQUIPPED
This system automatically swivels the headlight
beam pattern horizontally to provide increased
illumination in the direction the vehicle is steering.
NOTE:
Each time the Adaptive Headlight system is
turned on, the headlights will initialize by
performing a brief sequence of rotations.
The Adaptive Headlight system is active only
when the vehicle is moving forward.
The Adaptive Headlight system can be turned on or
off using the Uconnect system; refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY
This feature provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds (programmable)
when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in
the OFF position while the headlights are still on.
Then, turn off the headlights within 45 seconds.
The delay interval begins when the headlight
switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or
place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position,
the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition,
they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of placing the ignition in the OFF position to acti-
vate this feature.
The headlight delay time is programmable using
the Uconnect system, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position, a chime will
sound to alert the driver when the driver's door is
opened.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
Fog Light Switch
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights,
either push the headlight switch a second time or
turn off the headlight switch.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam head-
lights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster
display flash to show proper operation of the front
and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
tive outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light
when the lever is moved, it would suggest that
the indicator bulb is defective.
A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and a continuous
chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal (right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open. The Battery Protection
also includes the glove compartment light and the
trunk light. To restore interior light operation after
automatic battery protection is enabled (lights off),
either place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, or
cycle the light switch.
COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing
the top corner of the lens. To turn the lights off,
push the lens a second time.
Courtesy Lights
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the
overhead console.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on
either side of the console. These buttons are
backlit for night time visibility. To turn the lights off,
push the switch a second time. The lights will also
turn on when the unlock button on the key fob is
pushed.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient
light feature. This light casts illumination for
improved visibility of the floor and center console
area.
Ambient Light
Rotate the right dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the brightness
of the door handle lights, map pocket lights, and
ambient light located in the overhead console.
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch
and is located on the left side of the instrument
panel.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the left dimmer control upward will increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights, radio,
and lighted cupholders (if equipped).
Dome Light Position
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control
completely upward to the second detent to turn on
the interior lights. The interior lights will remain on
when the instrument panel dimmer control is in
this position.
Interior Light Defeat (Off)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the
extreme bottom (O) off position. The interior lights
will remain off when the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control
upward to the first detent. This feature brightens
all text displays such as the odometer, instrument
cluster display, and radio when the parking lights
or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield
wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC position. The multifunction
lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed
wiper operation, or to the second detent past the
intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to
the windshield wipers may result if the wiper
control is left in any position other than off.
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
switch and allow the wipers to return to the
park position before turning off the engine. If
the wiper switch is left on and the wipers
freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper
motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the off position. If the windshield
wiper control is turned off and the blades
cannot return to the off position, damage to
the wiper motor may occur.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather
conditions make a single wiping cycle with a
variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
position, and then turn the end of the lever to
select the desired delay interval. There are four
delay settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe
interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles when the vehicle speed is over
10 mph (16 km/h). The delay intervals will double
in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph
(16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever
inward (toward the steering column) and hold it for
as long as washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield
wiper control is in the delay range, the wipers will
operate for two wipe cycles after releasing the
lever and then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield
wiper is turned off, the wipers will operate for
three wipe cycles and then turn off.
Mist Feature
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the MIST
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off
road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The
wipers will continue to operate until you release
the multifunction lever.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the windshield. The washer function must be used
in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the wipers
for the driver. The feature is especially useful for
road splash or over spray from the windshield
washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of
the multifunction lever to one of four settings to
activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with
the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is
the least sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is
the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for
normal rain conditions. Settings 1 and 2 can be
used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity.
Setting 4 can be used if the driver desires more
sensitivity. The rain sensing wipers will
automatically change between an intermittent
wipe, slow wipe and a fast wipe depending on
the amount of moisture that is sensed on the
windshield. Place the wiper switch in the
OFF position when not using the system.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
warm the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect system, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when
the wiper speed is in the low or high position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function prop-
erly when ice or dried salt water is present on
the windshield.
Use of products containing wax or silicone may
reduce rain sensor performance.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features
for the wiper blades and arms. It will not operate
under the following conditions:
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain
Sensing feature will not operate when the igni-
tion is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
vehicle is stationary and the outside tempera-
ture is below 32°F (0°C), unless the wiper
control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph
(0 km/h) or the outside temperature rises
above freezing.
Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature
will not operate when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, the automatic transmis-
sion gear selector is in the NEUTRAL position
and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph
(5 km/h), unless the wiper control on the multi-
function lever is moved or the gear selector is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has
been selected, and no other inhibit conditions
(mentioned previously) exist.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
located on the touchscreen (if equipped) and on
the instrument panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
O
VERVIEW
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Automatic Climate Controls
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the touchscreen to change the current setting to the coldest output of air.
The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between recirculation
mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator illuminates when Recirculation is on. Recirculation can be used when
outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation
may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control section. Continuous use of the Recirculation
mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and press AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain your desired temperature by automatically adjusting
the blower speed and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly recommended for efficiency. You can press and release this button on
the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to turn AUTO on. The AUTO indicator illuminates when AUTO is on. Toggling
this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes.
Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the
current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the
windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost
mode button, the climate system will return to the previous setting.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touchscreen or
press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the
blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The Sync indicator illuminates when Sync is on.
Sync synchronizes the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available.
The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Icon Description
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode buttons on the touchscreen to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air.
The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor
outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Icon Description
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
CLIMATE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the air
conditioning system. When the air conditioning
system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow
through the outlets into the cabin. For improved
fuel economy, push the A/C button to turn off the
air conditioning and manually adjust the blower
and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to
select only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode and adjust blower
speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for
an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a
gentle water spray from the front of the radiator
and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and
the prior settings. The button illuminates when
MAX A/C is on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position
can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing
other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The
Recirculation feature may be unavailable (button
on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist
that could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off.
Icon Description
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
press and release the AUTO button on the
touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the driver
and passenger temperature control buttons.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to change the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature, mode,
and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower
fan will remain on low until the engine warms up.
The blower will increase in speed and transition
into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system is
being used in the manual mode.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run
the air conditioning system at idle for about five
minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting on
high. This will ensure adequate system lubrication
to minimize the possibility of compressor damage
when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods,
as fogging may occur.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they
could plug the water drains. In Winter months, make
sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The window controls on the driver's door control all
the door windows.
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls on each
passenger door trim panel, which operate the
passenger door windows. The window controls will
operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect system,
the power window switches will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The time is programmable.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is
Very Hot
Set the mode control to
, on, and blower
on high. Roll down the
windows for a minute to
flush out the hot air.
Adjust the controls as
needed to achieve
comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn
on and set the mode
control to the
position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in position.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to
and turn on to
keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
the position. If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to the
position.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and, in some models, passenger power
window switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push
the window switch to the second detent, release,
and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window
switch to the first detent and release it when you
want the window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch
Protection — If Equipped
Pull window up switch to second detent for at least
a half of a second and the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window during an Auto-Up operation,
push or pull the window switch again.
To close the window part way, pull and hold the
window switch briefly and release it when you want
the window to stop.
NOTE:
If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto-Closure, it will reverse direction and then
go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
window switch again to close the window.
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the Auto-Reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull and
hold the switch to close the window manually.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up
for an additional two seconds after the window
is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the
second detent to open the window completely
and continue to hold the switch down for an
additional two seconds after the window is
fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on
the rear passenger doors and the rear sunscreen
(if equipped). To disable the window controls and
the rear sunscreen, push and release the window
lockout button (setting it in the down position).
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power windows.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
Occupants, particularly unattended children,
can become entrapped by the windows while
operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all
objects from the window before closing.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
To enable the window controls and the rear
sunscreen, push and release the window lockout
button again (setting it in the up position).
Window Lockout Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound
in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
with the windows down, or the sunroof (if
equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be
minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting
occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The Panoramic sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switch is located to the right
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
Panoramic Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occu-
pants, particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof while
operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
parts, or any object, to project through the
sunroof opening. Injury may result.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
OPENING SUNROOF
Express Mode
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second. The sunroof will open
automatically to the open position. This is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation,
any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward. The sunroof will stop automatically at
the open position. Any release of the switch will
stop the movement. The sunroof and sunshade will
remain in a partially opened condition until the
switch is pushed and held rearward again.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated the
sunshade will automatically open to the half open
position prior to the sunroof opening.
Vent Open
Push and release the vent switch within one-half
second and the sunroof will open to the vent
position. This is called “Express Vent”, and it will
occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express vent operation, any movement of the
switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automati-
cally cycle to the halfway open position prior to the
sunroof opening to the Vent position.
CLOSING SUNROOF
Express Mode
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation,
any other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in
the forward position. Any release of the switch will
stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in
a partially closed condition until the sunroof switch
is pushed again.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type
sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind
buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof
(if equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be
minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open
any window.
OPENING POWER SHADE
Express Mode
Push the shade switch rearward and release it
within one-half second and the shade will
automatically open to the halfway position and
stop automatically. Push the switch a second time
from the halfway position and the shade will
automatically open to the full open position and
stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”.
During Express Open operation, any movement of
the shade switch will stop the shade.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Manual Mode
To open the shade, push and hold the switch
rearward. The shade will open and stop
automatically at the half-open position. Push and
hold the shade switch rearward again and the
shade will open automatically to the full-open
position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed again.
CLOSING POWER SHADE
Express Mode
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will close
automatically from any position. If the sunroof is
completely closed the shade will close fully and
stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”.
During Express Close operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the shade.
NOTE:
If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button
again will automatically close both the sunroof and
shade completely.
Manual Mode
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the shade will remain in a
partially closed condition until the switch is pushed
again.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically
retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will
disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual
Mode.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and
clear out any debris that may have collected in the
tracks.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
NOTE:
The power sunroof switch can remain active in
Accessory Delay for up to approximately
10 minutes after the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
This feature is programmable using the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOOD
TO OPEN THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center
front edge of the hood, and push the safety
catch to the left to release it, before raising the
hood.
Hood Safety Latch
TO CLOSE THE HOOD
Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from
the point where the props no longer hold the hood
open.
TRUNK
OPENING
The trunk can be opened from inside the vehicle
using the power trunk button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
The trunk lid can be opened from outside the
vehicle by pushing the trunk button on the key fob
twice within five seconds or by using the trunk
passive entry button located on the underside of
the decklid overhang. The release feature will
function only when the vehicle is unlocked or a
valid Passive Entry key fob is within 5 ft (1.5m) of
the trunk.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close.
Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches.
Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the trunk
open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer
display will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition in the OFF position, the trunk
open symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
NOTE:
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in
”Doors” in this chapter for further information on
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
Opening From Inside The Vehicle
Interior Power Trunk Release
The trunk can be opened from inside the
vehicle using the power trunk release
button located on the instrument panel
to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.
Opening From Outside The Vehicle
To Unlock/Open The Trunk
The trunk may be unlocked/opened using either of
the following methods:
Key Fob Trunk Release Button
Passive Entry Button
Key Fob Trunk Release Button
Push the power trunk button on the key
fob twice within five seconds to open the
trunk.
Passive Entry Button
The trunk passive entry button is located on the
back of the trunk lid. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the trunk, push the
passive entry button to open the trunk.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
CLOSING
With one or more hands placed on the outside
trunk surface push the trunk lid down until you
hear the trunk lock latch into place.
NOTE:
Before closing the trunk lid make sure your key fob
isn’t inside the trunk area. The trunk will latch then
automatically unlock if the key fob is sensed, not
allowing the key fob to be locked in the trunk area.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
TRUNK SAFETY
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency
release lever is built into the trunk latching
mechanism. In the event of an individual being
locked inside the trunk, the trunk can be opened
by actuating the glow-in-the-dark handle attached
to the trunk latching mechanism.
Trunk Emergency Release
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With
60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides
cargo-carrying versatility. The seatbacks fold down
easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks
and the bolsters. When the seats are folded down,
they provide a continuous, nearly-flat extension of
the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright
position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling
on the top of the seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the
trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from
outside, or through the inside of the vehicle.
Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is
unattended. Once in the trunk, young children
may not be able to escape, even if they entered
through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk,
children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position, the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with
the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded
down position) should not be used as a play
area by children at any time. They could be
seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
To help protect against personal injury,
passengers should not be seated in the rear
cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended
for load carrying purposes only, not for
passengers, who should sit in seats and use
seat belts.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Trunk Mat — If Equipped
A trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo area.
The trunk mat is used to protect the interior of the
trunk from mud, snow, and debris.
Grocery Bag Hooks
The rear cargo area is equipped with grocery bag
hooks, located on either side of the rear cargo
area.
Grocery Bag Hooks
Cargo Net — If Equipped
The rear cargo area may be equipped with a cargo
net to keep items secure while driving.
Rear Cargo Net
Attachment
To attach the cargo net, the clips must be hooked
through the loops on both sides of the cargo area.
Cargo Net Attachments
The weight and position of cargo and
passengers can change the vehicle center of
gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of
control resulting in personal injury, follow these
guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor.
Put heavier objects as low and as far forward
as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
rear axle. Too much weight or improperly
placed weight over or behind the rear axle can
cause the rear of the vehicle to sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair visibility
or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden
stop or collision.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum weight limit 50 lbs
(22 kg) of the grocery bag hook. Damage may
occur to hook and mounting surface.
1 — Top Attachment
2 — Bottom Attachment
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide a
level-riding vehicle under most passenger and
cargo loading conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock
absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the
correct height. It takes approximately 1 mile
(1.6 km) of driving for the leveling to complete
depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for
approximately 15 hours, the leveling system will
bleed itself down. The vehicle must be driven to
reset the system.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home
security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered
by your vehicle’s battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the
overhead console, headliner or sunvisor,
designate the three different HomeLink®
channels. The HomeLink® indicator is located
above the center button.
Overhead Console HomeLink® Buttons
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the Radio Frequency (RF) signal it
is recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position, and push and hold the two
outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to
20 seconds or until the orange indicator flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first
time. Do not erase channels when programming
additional buttons.
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were
manufactured after 1995. These garage door
openers can be identified by the “LEARN” or
“TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
NOTE:
It is NOT the button that is normally used to open
and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Training The Garage Door Opener
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold the
hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink®
has received the frequency signal from the
hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons
after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. On the garage door opener (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the garage door
opener/device motor. Firmly push and release
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
garage door openers/devices there may be a
light that blinks when the garage door opener/
device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button twice
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE:
If the garage door opener/device does not
activate, push the button a third time (for two
seconds) to complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers
manufactured before 1995.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Press and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you press and hold the
hand-held transmitter button.
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink®
has received the frequency signal from the
hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons
after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United
States that require the transmitter signals to
“time-out” after several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds
of transmission – which may not be long enough
for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some
U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the
same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating of
the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release (“cycle”)
your hand-held transmitter every two seconds
until HomeLink® has successfully accepted
the frequency signal. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change
flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or
longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device
for programming, plug it back in at this time.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
USING HOMELINK®
To operate, push and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for
the programmed device (i.e. garage door opener,
gate operator, security system, entry door lock,
home/office lighting, etc.). The hand-held
transmitter of the device may also be used at any
time.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or
turn in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons
for 20 seconds until the orange indicator flashes.
Note that all channels will be erased. Individual
channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled
when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming
HomeLink®, here are some of the most common
solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door
opener to complete the training for a rolling
code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the
garage while programming the transceiver.
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if
people, pets or other objects are in the path of
the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with
a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by Federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do
not use a garage door opener without these
safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
Glove Compartment
Cubby Bin
There is a cubby bin located forward of the gear
selector. The cubby bin is covered with a
push-push actuated door. Push inward on the door
to open it; push the door a second time to close it.
Cubby Bin
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Console Features
Two separate storage compartments are located
underneath the center console armrest.
Center Console
Inside the center console armrest, there is a
removable upper storage tray that can be slid
forward/rearward on rails for access to the lower
storage area. This tray has an integrated coin
holder, along with additional area for small items
and handheld devices. Below the upper tray, the
lower storage compartment is made for larger
items. In addition, the 12 volt power outlet, USB,
and AUX jack are located here.
Upper Storage Tray
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas.
Front Door Trim Storage
Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped
For rear passengers, there is a storage bin located
in the armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the
storage compartment.
Rear Armrest Storage
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of
the center console.
Retractable Cover
Front Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center
armrest between the rear seats. The cupholders
are positioned forward in the armrest and
side-by-side to provide convenient access to
beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a
resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.
Rear Seat Cupholders
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped
On some vehicles the front cupholders are
equipped with a light ring that illuminates the
cupholders for the front passengers.
Light Ring In Front Cupholder
The rear cupholders may also be equipped with a
light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the
rear passengers. The light ring is controlled by the
Dimmer Control. Refer to “Interior Lights” in this
chapter for further information.
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Heated And Cooled Cupholders —
If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and
cooled cupholders. The cupholders are designed
to help keep warm beverages warm and cool
beverages cool.
Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches
Push the “Cold” symbol once to turn on the
cupholder. Push the symbol a second time to turn
the cupholder off. Push the “Hot” symbol once to
activate the cupholder. Push the symbol a second
time to turn off the cupholder.
POWER SUNSHADE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power
sunshade that will reduce the amount of sunlight
that will shine through the rear windshield.
The power sunshade can be operated using the
Uconnect system.
Press the “Controls” button and then press the
“Rear Sunshade” button to raise the power
sunscreen. Press the “Rear Sunshade” button a
second time to lower the sunshade.
If the sunshade is in the raised position and the
vehicle is placed in REVERSE, the sunshade will
automatically fully lower. When the transmission is
shifted out of REVERSE the sunshade will
automatically return to the fully raised position
after a brief delay.
The power sunshade can also be operated by
passengers in the rear seats. The power sunshade
switch is located on the back of the center console
between the heated seat switches. Push the
switch once to raise the sunshade. Push the switch
a second time to lower the sunshade.
Power Sunshade Switch Behind Center Console
NOTE:
The rear sunshade control switch can be locked
out along with the rear passenger window controls
from the driver switch window lockout switch.
WARNING!
When using the cupholder in the “Hot” position,
avoid contact with the heated portion of the
cupholder in order to reduce the possibility of
burns. Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injuries,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise particular care
in order to prevent serious burn injury. Keep the
cupholder free of debris or stray objects when
operated in the “Hot” position.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with one 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlet on the instrument panel and one
12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet in the center
console that can be used to power cellular phones,
small electronics and other low powered electrical
accessories. The power outlets are labeled with
either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how
the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a
“key” are powered when the ignition switch is in
the ACC or ON/RUN position, while the outlets
labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to
the battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage
area on the center stack of the instrument panel.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a
power outlet located in the storage area of the
center console.
Center Console Power Outlet
NOTE:
If the Media Hub is in use, do not exceed the
maximum power of 100 Watts (8 Amps) for the
center console power outlet. When the Media Hub
is not in use, the outlet can deliver up to 120 Watts
(10 Amps). If the power rating is exceeded, the
fuse protecting the system will need to be
replaced.
The instrument panel power outlet and dual rear
console USB ports can be changed to “battery”
(powered at all times) by moving the #12 20 Amp
fuse from “IGN” to “B+”. These fuses are located in
the fuse box in the trunk, below the load floor.
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located
on the center console on vehicles not equipped
with the ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily
injury could result.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
SUNGLASSES BIN DOOR
At the front of the console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a “push/push”
design. Push the chrome pad on the door to open.
Push the chrome pad on the door to close.
Sunglasses Bin Door
1 — #12 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Panel
Power Outlet / Dual USB Charge Only Ports
2 — #38 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Center Console
Power Outlet / Media Hub
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery even when
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu-
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
must be driven a sufficient length of time to
allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle's
battery.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory
or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper
use of the power outlet can cause damage.
2
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster For 3.6L Engine
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 73
Instrument Cluster For 5.7L Engine
3
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the instrument cluster
display messages. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in this section for further
information.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within the
normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, or when
towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal oper-
ating range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the Keyless Push Button
Ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
For further information refer to “Refueling The
Vehicle” in “Starting And Operating.”
NOTE:
The warning / indicator Lights will briefly illuminate
for a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the
driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/
closing of a door will activate the display for
viewing, and display the total miles, or kilometers,
in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is
designed to display important information about
your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver
interactive display located on the instrument
panel, your instrument cluster display can show
you how systems are working and give you
warnings when they are not. The steering wheel
mounted controls allow you to scroll through the
main menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make selections
and adjustments.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features an
interactive display which is located in the
instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select
a variety of useful information by pushing the
arrow buttons located on the left side of the
steering wheel. The instrument cluster display
menu items consist of the following:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the
up or down arrow button allows you
to cycle through the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title
area.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the
left or right arrow button allows you
to cycle through the submenu items of the Main
menu item.
NOTE:
Holding the
up / down or left / right
arrow button will loop the user through the
currently selected menu or options presented
on the screen.
Upon returning to a main menu, the last
submenu screen viewed within that main menu
will be displayed.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer:
Pushing the
OK button changes units
(mph or km/h).
For Screen Setup:
OK button allows user to enter menu and
submenus.
Within each submenu layer, the
up and
down arrow buttons will allow the user to
select the item of interest.
Pushing the
OK button makes the selection.
A confirmation screen will appear, returning the
user to the first page of the submenu.
Pushing the
left arrow button will exit each
submenu layer and return to the main menu.
For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus:
Information is reset by pushing and holding the
OK button.
3
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ENGINE OIL LIFE RESET
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required”
message will display in the instrument cluster
display for five seconds after a single chime has
sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push
and release the
OK or arrow buttons. To reset the
oil change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance), refer to the following
procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display
controls for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to
“Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the
right arrow button to
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the
OK button to reset oil life.
If conditions are met, the gauge and numeric
display will update to show 100%. If conditions
are not met a pop-up message of "To reset oil
life engine must be off with ignition in run" will
be displayed (for five seconds), and the user
will remain at the Oil Life screen.
5. Push and release the
up or down arrow
button to exit the submenu screen.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the
ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
S
ELECTABLE MENU ITEMS
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the desired Selectable Menu item is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
Speedometer
Push and release the OK button to toggle between
mph and km/h.
Vehicle Info
The Vehicle Info consists of the following submenu
(pushing the
left or right arrow button will
allow you to scroll through the submenu):
Tire Pressure Monitor
Coolant Temperature
Transmission Temperature
Oil Temperature
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 77
Oil Pressure
Oil Life
Battery Voltage
AWD Status — If Equipped
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu provides the status and
visuals about the Adaptive Cruise Control and
LaneSense features. When they are both off the
screen, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) and LaneSense Off."
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature —
If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current
ACC system settings. The information displayed
depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF
button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the instrument cluster
display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
steering wheel) and the following will display in the
instrument cluster display:
ACC Set
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the
following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current
LaneSense system settings. The information
displayed depends on LaneSense system status.
Push the LaneSense button (located on the center
stack below the Uconnect display) until one of the
following displays in the instrument cluster display:
LaneSense Off
When LaneSense is deactivated, the display will
read “LaneSense Off.”
LaneSense On
When LaneSense is activated, the display will
read “LaneSense On.”
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Fuel Economy
The Fuel Economy Menu has two submenu pages;
one with Current Value (instantaneous calculation
of the fuel economy) displayed and one without the
Current Value displayed (toggle the
left or
right arrow button to select one):
Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L).
Range To Empty (miles or km).
Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L).
Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an
amber color and turn green as Fuel Economy
improves.
Hold the
OK button to reset average fuel
economy information.
3
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip Info
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Trip Menu item is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Toggle the
left or
right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B. The
Trip information will display the following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km)
traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average
fuel economy (MPG, L/100km or km/L) of Trip A
or Trip B since the last reset.
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of
travel since the last reset.
Hold the
OK button to reset feature information.
Audio
This menu displays the Audio information of the
currently playing audio source (e.g. FM radio).
Messages
This feature shows the number of stored warning
messages, if any. Pushing the
left or right
arrow button will allow you to scroll through the
stored messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to enter the submenus. The Screen
Setup feature allows you to change what
information is displayed in the instrument cluster
as well as the location that information is
displayed.
NOTE:
Screen Setup is available only when the vehicle is
not in motion.
1. Upper Left
Compass (default)
Outside Temp.
Time
Range
Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
None
2. Upper Right
Compass
Outside Temp (default)
Time
Range
Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
None
3. Center
Menu Title (default)
Compass
Outside Temp.
Time
Range
Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Audio
Digital Speed
None
4. Current Gear
On
Off (default)
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79
5. Odometer
Show (default)
Hide
6. Fuel Gauge
Standard (default)
Detailed
7. Restore Default
OK
Cancel
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of
the electrical system and status of the vehicle
battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will
take place to extend the driving time and distance
of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or
turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a risk
of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle
may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not
restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a
low state of charge and continues to lose electrical
charge at a rate that the charging system cannot
sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a diag-
nostic on the charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system.
Refer to “Battery Charge Warning Light” in this
section for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off
(if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel —
If Equipped
Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because
the electrical loads are larger than the capability
of the charging system. The charging system is
still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior
lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volts,
115 Volts AC, USB ports) during certain
driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms
and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by
long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period
of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load
left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances
like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and
similar devices.
3
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
“Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review
specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw
currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecutive
trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and
driving pattern did not help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
These indications are indicative and precautionary
and as such must not be considered as exhaustive
and/or alternative to the information contained in
the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active warning lights will display first
if applicable. The system check menu may appear
different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some warning lights are
optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and will
turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the
fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during
startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake
light turns on it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level
is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock
brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates
a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or
that a problem with the Brake Booster has been
detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
in the master cylinder has dropped below a
specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an
EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on
along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the
ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake
is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake appli-
cation.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may
be a malfunction with the charging
system. Contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door
is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning
Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the Electric Power
Steering (EPS) system. Refer to “Power
Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle is
running, the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the
ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely
stopped and the transmission is placed in the
PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light
remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle
will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
3
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too high,
this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the
upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four
minutes or until the engine is able to cool,
whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal,
turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer.
A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine
as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously and a chime
will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn
of a high transmission fluid temperature.
This may occur with strenuous usage
such as trailer towing. If this light turns
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or
slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK or
NEUTRAL, until the light turns off. Once the light
turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the
trunk is open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is
disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light
will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
the light stays on through several typical driving
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced
by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this
occurs.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage
or transmission failure.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver,
occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel
economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
3
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
Electronic Stability Control system is
Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, and when ESC is activated. It should go
out with the engine running. If the “ESC Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indi-
cator Light” come on momentarily each time the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it
was turned off previously.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Refer to “Engine Compartment” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for further
information.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that the
tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned previously, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure warning
light when one or more of your tires is significantly
underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop
and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
warning light.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
warning light. When the system detects a
malfunction, the warning light will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction warning light after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 1.9 gal (7.13 L), this
light will turn on and a single chime
will sound.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required as
soon as possible. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
have the brake system inspected by an authorized
dealer.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward Collision
Warning System. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW)" in
"Safety" for further information.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
3
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will turn on to indicate
the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not
functioning properly and that service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the
driver with visual and steering torque
warnings when the vehicle starts to drift
out of its lane unintentionally without the
use of a turn signal.
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the LaneSense indicator changes
from solid green to solid yellow.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the LaneSense indicator changes
from solid white/green to flashing yellow.
Refer to “LaneSense – If Equipped" in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Service LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and
requires service. Please see an
authorized dealer.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off.
Refer to “Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) With Mitigation Operation — If Equipped” in
“Safety” for further information.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
ECO Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ECO Mode is
active.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Vehicle Light —
If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and
a target vehicle is detected. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without
Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped
This will display the distance setting for
the ACC system when the system is
engaged. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is set to the desired
speed. Refer to “Speed Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front fog lights are on.
Refer to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates
solid green when both lane markings
have been detected and the system is
“armed” and ready to provide visual and
torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure
occurs.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the park lights or headlights are turned
on.
Refer to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or
up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) has been turned on,
but is not set. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is ready, but not set.
Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but
not armed, the LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid white. This occurs when
only left, right, or neither lane line has
been detected. If a single lane line is detected, the
system is ready to provide only visual warnings if
an unintentional lane departure occurs on the
detected lane line.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
3
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam headlights
are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to
pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II.
This system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current government
regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in
making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection port
to allow access to information related to the
performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to access
this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in
“Multimedia”.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
before any emissions tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies
the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” is
functioning and is not on when the
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready.
The OBD II system may
not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery
or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system
should be determined not ready for the I/M test,
your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station.
To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready,
you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol come on as part
of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
not
ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you
can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is
not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
in order for your OBD II system to update. A
recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station.
The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the
MIL is on with the engine running.
3
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake performance
under most braking conditions. The system
automatically prevents wheel lock, and enhances
vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that
the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle
is started and driven. During this self-check, you
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels begin to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps,
railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may
increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for
a short time after the stop)
The clicking sound of solenoid valves
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification
may result in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer-
ence caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This
interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qual-
ified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
SAFETY 91
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will
turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on
or comes on while driving, it indicates that the
anti-lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning
Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the
brake system should be serviced as soon as
possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system
includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD),
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist
System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Traction
Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle
stability and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready
Alert Braking (RAB), and Rain Brake Support (RBS).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to
optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during
emergency braking maneuvers. The system
detects an emergency braking situation by sensing
the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can
help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS).
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best
BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the
system, you must apply continuous braking
pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once
the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake
system is not functioning properly and that
immediate service is required. If the “Brake
System Warning Light” does not come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the
light repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
prevent collisions, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a
BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 SAFETY
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to
prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle
instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
entering the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) before
the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
The Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) system
anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle
and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen
the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during
severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking
objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for a complete expla-
nation of the available ESC modes.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system
enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to
assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help
the vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
located in the instrument cluster will start to flash
as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur.
ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs,
especially those that involve leaving the roadway
or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user's safety
or the safety of others.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
SAFETY 93
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE:
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
"ESC On"
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used for
most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes
should only be used for specific reasons as noted
in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when
a more spirited driving experience is desired. This
mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than
normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the
vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push
the “ESC OFF” switch and the “ESC OFF Indicator
Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again,
momentarily push the “ESC OFF” switch and the
“ESC OFF Indicator Light” will turn off.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to
inappropriate driver input for the conditions.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and
may negatively affect the performance of the
ESC system. Changes to the steering system,
suspension, braking system, tire type and size
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle mainte-
nance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING!
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section), has been disabled
and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be
illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the
engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 SAFETY
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a
momentary button push will toggle the ESC
mode. Multiple momentary button pushes may
be required to return to “"ESC On"”.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
If Equipped — "ESC Sport" and "ESC Track" are
ESC “Partial Off” mode(s).
Full Off – If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC features are
turned off. To enter the “Full Off” mode, push and
hold the “ESC OFF” switch for five seconds while
the vehicle is stopped with the engine running.
After five seconds, a chime will sound, the
“ESC OFF Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the
“ESC OFF” message will display in the instrument
cluster. To turn ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC OFF” switch.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster
will come on when the ignition is placed
in the ON position. It should go out with
the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system.
If this light remains on after several ignition cycles,
and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and
corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
(located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as
soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system
becomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If
the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will
not engage to assist in maintaining stability.
ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable.
In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC
system will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is only intended
for off-highway or off-road use.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent collisions.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
SAFETY 95
NOTE:
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come
on momentarily each time the ignition is turned
on.
Each time the ignition is turned on, the ESC
system will be on even if it was turned off previ-
ously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates
the customer has elected to have the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a
reduced mode.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to
mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on an
incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the
brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does
not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle
will roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for
HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The park brake must be off.
Driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward
gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the trans-
mission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles
equipped with a manual transmission, if the
clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is
not a substitute for active driving involvement.
It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people,
and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision or
serious personal injury.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 SAFETY
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
display, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument
cluster display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels
pointing straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than
one-half turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC OFF” button located in the lower
switch bank below the climate control four
times within 20 seconds. The “ESC OFF
Indicator Light” should turn on and turn off
two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and
then an additional slightly more than one-half
turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and then
back to ON. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this
feature to its previous setting.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support (RBS) may improve braking
performance in wet conditions. It will periodically
apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove
any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It
functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or
HI speed. When RBS is active, there is no
notification to the driver and no driver interaction is
required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) may reduce the time
required to reach full braking during emergency
braking situations. It anticipates when an
emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the
driver. The Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) will
prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there
may not be enough brake pressure to hold
both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when
the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
rolling down an incline while resuming accel-
eration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to
releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle.
Also, be certain to place the transmission in
PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
SAFETY 97
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the
amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels.
If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake
pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce
engine power to provide enhanced acceleration
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a
driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will
apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine torque to be applied to the
wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced
mode.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two
radar sensors, located inside the rear bumper
fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter
the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of
the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light
will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one
lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside rear
view mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m)
beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides
of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will
alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. There-
fore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for
both your vehicle and trailer before making a
lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e.,
bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the
side of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM
warning light randomly alerting on the trailer or
even remaining illuminated the entire time the
vehicle is in a forward gear.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of the
side mirror Warning Indicator lamps when a
motorcycle or any small object remains at the
side of the vehicle for extended periods of time
(more than a couple of seconds).
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 SAFETY
The area on the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice,
and dirt/road contamination so that the BSM
system can function properly. Do not block the
area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.).
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning
light located in the outside mirrors in addition to
sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the
radio volume if the corresponding turn signal is
activated. Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for
further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM
system will issue an alert during these types of
zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from
either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with
a relative speed of less than 31 mph (50 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately
1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated.
If the difference in speed between the two vehicles
is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
SAFETY 99
Overtaking/Approaching
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts,
walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally
the system may alert on such objects. This is
normal operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle
in adjacent lanes.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP) - If Equipped
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to
aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces
where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be
blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the
parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is
exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear
view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle
is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects
moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph
(32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
The BSM system is not designed to detect
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 SAFETY
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available
in the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object.
However, when the system is operating in Rear
Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in
the appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. If the turn signal is then activated,
and it corresponds to an alert present on that side
of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be
sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio
(if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/
hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state
always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be
no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or
RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
vehicle is started the previously stored mode will
be recalled and used.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking
lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you,
and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
SAFETY 101
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION OPERATION -
I
F EQUIPPED
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument
cluster display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn
the driver when it detects a potential frontal
collision. The warnings and limited braking are
intended to provide the driver with enough time to
react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors, as well as the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system, to calculate the probability of
a forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver will
be provided with audible and visual warnings and
may provide a brake jerk warning. If the driver does
not take action based upon these progressive
warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system
determines that the driver intends to avoid the
collision by braking but has not applied sufficient
brake force, the system will compensate and
provide additional brake force as required. If a
Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the
system may provide the maximum or partial
braking to mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and
then release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
1 mph (2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign
posts based on the course prediction. This is
expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
and functionality.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 SAFETY
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
such misuse of the system, after four Active
Braking events within an ignition cycle, the
Active Braking portion of FCW will be deacti-
vated until the next ignition cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent unnec-
essary warnings to the surroundings.
Turning FCW On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is on; this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
The Forward Collision activation/deactivation is
located in "Uconnect Settings" under "Safety And
Driving Assistance". Forward Collision can be
checked or unchecked.
When FCW is selected off, there will be an "FCW
OFF" icon that appears in the instrument cluster
display.
Changing the FCW status to off prevents the
system from warning you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you.
NOTE:
The FCW system’s default state is on. The FCW
system state is kept in memory from one ignition
cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will
remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking settings are
programmable through the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and
the Active Braking is set to “on”; this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are farther away
and it applies limited braking. This gives you the
most reaction time to avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting,
allows the system to warn you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you when you
are much closer. This setting provides less
reaction time than the “Far” setting, which allows
for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
The system will retain the last setting selected
by the driver after ignition shut down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects
not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects
that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading
vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.
FCW disables in the same manner as ACC, and
will display a screen indicating that the feature
is unavailable when it has been disabled.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that limits
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance is
no longer present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW
detect every type of potential collision. The driver
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering.
Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
SAFETY 103
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
display reads:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should
be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects and natural pressure loss
through the tire.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 SAFETY
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the
low tire pressure warning (TPMS Warning Light)
illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold placard pressure in order
for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the TPMS Warning
Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the
tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa).
This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn
on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation,
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance or to provide warning of
a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu-
rate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination
of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
tire pressure in the tire.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the
receiver module.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
The TPM sensor is not designed for use on
aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance or sensor
damage. Customers are encouraged to use
OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature
operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer to have your sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the TPMS
sensor.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
SAFETY 105
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light will illuminate in
the instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of
the four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display an “Inflate to XX”
message and a graphic showing the pressure
values of each tire with the low tire pressure values
shown in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
condition (those shown in a different color in the
instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the “Inflate to XX” message.
Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically update,
the graphic display in the instrument cluster will
change color back to the original color, and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 SAFETY
Service Tire Pressure System Warning
If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a chime.
In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
"Service Tire Pressure System" message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the
system fault no longer exists, the TPMS Warning
Light will no longer flash, and the "Service Tire
Pressure System" message will no longer display,
and a pressure value will display in place of the
dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of
the following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices or
driving next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPM sensors.
Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels
or wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full
size does not have a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will
not monitor the pressure in the compact
spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full
size spare tire in place of a road tire that has a
pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, the TPMS
Warning Light will remain on and a chime will
sound. In addition, the graphic in the
instrument cluster will still display a different
color pressure value and an "Inflate to XX"
message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a “Service Tire
Pressure System” message for five seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will
display a “Service Tire Pressure System”
message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
compact spare or non-matching full size, the
TPMS will update automatically. In addition,
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off and the
graphic in the instrument cluster will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as
long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
SAFETY 107
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can
be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such
as when installing winter wheel and tire
assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not
equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM)
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime,
the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument
cluster will display the “Service Tire Pressure
System” message and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “Service Tire
Pressure System” message in the instrument
cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the
pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with
TPM sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The
instrument cluster will display the “Service Tire
Pressure System” message and then display
pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition cycle the "Service Tire Pressure System"
message will no longer be displayed as long as no
system fault exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others.
If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 SAFETY
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passengers
as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further
information) must be secured in the
appropriate child restraint or belt-positioning
booster seat in a rear seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with
your child restraint to make sure that you are
using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow the
front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully
into the space between occupants and the
door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person,
refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for
customer service contact information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be
a poor driver and could cause a collision that
includes you. This can happen far away from home
or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert
feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
SAFETY 109
(Continued)
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the
START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard
front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
animal or other items are placed on the outboard
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
with you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you
can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 SAFETY
(Continued)
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position to minimize
the risk of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
matter what their size.
WARNING!
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision. You
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
WARNING!
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
SAFETY 111
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear
a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 SAFETY
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats,
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt away
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
button to release the anchorage, and move it up or
down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted
in the upward position without pushing or
squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the
adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original
seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt
Extender if, when worn, the distance between
the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender
buckle and the center of the occupant’s body
is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
can increase the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender
when the lap belt is not long enough and only
use in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
when not needed.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
SAFETY 113
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of
an accident is reduced for the mother and the
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips.
Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a
collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child
restraint system. For additional information, refer
to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section of
this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with
an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as
the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
restraint is installed in a seating position that has
a seat belt with this feature.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 SAFETY
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others.
If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.
The locked mode is only used to install
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
that have a harness for restraining the child.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
SAFETY 115
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position
or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system
that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled.
In this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until
the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been
detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately.
For additional information regarding the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” section of this
manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deployment.
A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for more
severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger seat
belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may
adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front
Air Bags based upon seat position.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort-
ably extending your arms to reach the steering
wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional. The protective covers for the air
bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
SAFETY 117
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
by themselves are not good indicators of whether
or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate
and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
of the driver and front passenger, and position the
front occupants for improved interaction with the
front air bags.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the
outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat
belts and body structure.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even
though you have air bags.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
citizen band radios, etc.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 SAFETY
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
the space between the occupant and the door. The
SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
high force that it could injure occupants if they are
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing
serious injury.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should
remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after-
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add
roof racks that require permanent attach-
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
SAFETY 119
(Continued)
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response
to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
than it takes to blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events. The
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat
belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy
the Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
priate) are necessary for your protection in all
collisions. They also help keep you in position,
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
pants must wear their seat belts properly and
sit upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a child
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
WARNING!
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 SAFETY
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain rollover or side impact
events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent
and normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or
if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme-
diately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
by-product of the process that generates the
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the
air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat
belt retractor assemblies replaced by an
authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the
Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
SAFETY 121
(Continued)
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the following
functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(if equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes
from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any
of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in
the engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine. If
there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
accident, reset the system by following the
procedure described below. If you have any doubt,
contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN
to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel
leaks in the engine compartment and on the
ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the
engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo-
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add after-
market side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
who works on your vehicle that it has an air
bag system.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such
data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
ating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden-
tally or may not function properly if modifica-
tions are made. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer
approved seat accessories may be used. If it is
necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
to hold even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
SAFETY 123
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost
large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check
the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to
http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-care-
givers
or call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who
have not reached the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth
until they reach the weight or height limit of the
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
SAFETY 125
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
their back is against the seatback, should use the
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child is
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child
restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal
injury.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
which may result in serious injury or death.
A child must always wear both the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to
install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
SAFETY 127
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage
system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child restraint
is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located in the panel between the rear
seatback and the rear window. They are found
under a plastic cover with the tether anchorage
symbol on it.
Tether Strap Anchorages
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more
child restraints. If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat
belt to install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact. See your child restraint
owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
SAFETY 129
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position
blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the
outboard position, do not use that outboard
position. If a child seat in the center position blocks
the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not
install a child seat in that outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the
Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt
each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the
section “Installing Child Restraints Using the
Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach
a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. Please refer to “To
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for
typical installation instructions.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap
portion of the seat belt tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for
additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
SAFETY 131
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
allow the webbing to retract back into the
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat
step 5.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with
the seat belt to attach a forward facing child
restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat
belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the
child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat
belt against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position
with an ALR retractor.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 SAFETY
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available. Refer to “Locating
The Upper Tether Anchorages” in this section
for details on the location of the tether
anchorages.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor
directly behind the seat where you are placing
the child restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower
the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat,
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
that seating position, located behind the top of
the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint
System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
SAFETY 133
(Continued)
Tether Strap Mounting
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown
in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Center Tether Attachment
1. If adjustable, lower the adjustable center
head restraint to the full down position.
2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and
head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the center tether anchorage
located in the panel between the rear
seatback and the rear window.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
2 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 SAFETY
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a
competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could
permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the
bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-
gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
SAFETY 135
(Continued)
(Continued)
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the
windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install
your floor mat upside down or turn your floor
mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is
secured using the floor mat fasteners on a
regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any
other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an
additional floor mat on top of an existing floor
mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced,
only use a FCA approved floor mat for the
specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer-
ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the
engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the
brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to
check for interference. If your floor mat inter-
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING!
4
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 SAFETY
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including
spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should
be located and corrected immediately.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
each pedal to check for interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using
the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
137
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your
seat belt, and if present, instruct all other
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The gear selector must be in the PARK position
before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in
the passenger compartment.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accel-
erator pedal.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in OFF mode, remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving chil-
dren in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short pushes in a row with
the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h)
before the engine will shut off. The ignition will
remain in the ACC mode until the gear selector
is in PARK and the button is pushed twice to
the OFF mode.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h),
the instrument cluster will display a “
Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the
vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine
will shut off and the ignition will remain in the ACC
position. If vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h), the vehicle will AutoPark. See
AutoPark section for further details.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
to an ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC,
and RUN. To change the ignition modes without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories, follow
these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
place the ignition to the ACC mode.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the RUN
mode.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
time to return the ignition to the OFF mode.
AutoPark
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations
on the following pages occur. It is a backup system
and should not be relied upon as the primary
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into
PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage
are outlined on the following pages.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off
the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector and an
eight speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place
the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL
CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying
that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in
the instrument cluster display and near the
gear selector. If the “P” indicator is blinking,
your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
into PARK.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC Mode.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector and an
eight speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not depressed
The message “
AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. In these cases,
the gear selector must be returned to “P” to select
desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage
ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift
to P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if
vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the “P” in the instrument
cluster display and near the gear selector. As an
added precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION (BELOW
–22°F O
R −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
use of an externally powered electric engine block
heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
recommended.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed
the "Normal Starting" or "Cold Weather Operation"
procedure, and has not experienced an extended
park condition as identified in "Extended Park
Starting" procedure it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold
it there. Crank the engine for no more than
15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in
case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key
in the RUN position, release the accelerator pedal
and repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the
vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll.
As an added precaution, always apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto-
matic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started,
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency”
for further information.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the
cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming effect
on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the
hood on the driver side of the vehicle. It has a
removable cap that is located near the air box.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, and rear
axle) in your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good
break-in. However, wide-open throttle acceleration
in low gear can be detrimental and should be
avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle
lubricant installed at the factory are high-quality
and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant
changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate and conditions under which vehicle
operations will occur. For the recommended
viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation.
This should be considered a normal part of the
break-in and not interpreted as an indication of
difficulty. Please check your oil level with the
engine oil indicator often during the break in
period. Add oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied and place the gear
selector in the PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below
the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To
apply the parking brake, firmly push the parking
brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake,
press the parking brake pedal a second time and
let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
Parking Brake
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds before
trying again.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
Oil in the engine or damage may result.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
(Continued)
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON/RUN position, the Brake Warning
Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the
transmission is placed in gear, the Brake
Warning Light will flash. If vehicle speed is
detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver.
Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
the parking brake before placing the gear selector
in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission
locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury
or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock
the vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may
allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission
is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
(Continued)
(Continued)
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in
PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF
mode. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently
leaving the vehicle without placing the
transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in
the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the
ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is
in PARK, and the ignition is
OFF (not in ACC mode)
before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission
Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also
be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at
low speeds.
EIGHT-SPEED AUTOMATIC
T
RANSMISSION
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission
is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
WARNING!
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
The transmission is controlled using a rotary
electronic gear selector located on the center
console. The transmission gear range (PRNDL/S)
is displayed both above the gear selector and in
the instrument cluster. To select a gear range,
simply rotate the gear selector. To access the L or
S position, push down on the gear selector and
then rotate it. You must also press the brake pedal
to shift the transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL,
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once
(such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear
selector to the appropriate detent. Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear
(for example, driver selects PARK while driving),
the position indicator will blink continuously until
the selector is returned to the proper position, or
the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts
its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
with environmental and road conditions. The
transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
Standard Gear Selector
The standard transmission gear selector has
PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift
positions. Using the LOW position manually
downshifts the transmission to a lower gear based
on vehicle speed.
Gear Selector
Premium Gear Selector With AutoStick
The premium transmission gear selector provides
PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and SPORT
shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using
the AutoStick shift control (shift paddles mounted
on the steering wheel). Pressing the shift paddles
(-/+) while in the DRIVE or SPORT position will
manually select the transmission gear, and will
display the current gear in the instrument cluster
as 1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to “AutoStick” in this section
for further information.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
(Continued)
(Continued)
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
ating. This is especially important when the engine
is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the
parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb
on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition OFF.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission
is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
WARNING!
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure
that you have properly engaged the transmission
into the PARK position:
Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P),
and is not blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply
the parking brake and shift the transmission into
PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all
forward gears. The DRIVE position provides
optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use
the AutoStick shift control (if equipped, refer to
“AutoStick” in this section for further information)
to select a lower gear. Under these conditions,
using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat buildup.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must start the engine, and
also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in
“In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F
[-30°C] or below), transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
SPORT (S) — IF EQUIPPED
This mode alters the transmission's automatic
shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds
are increased to make full use of available engine
power.
To access SPORT mode, push down on the gear
selector and rotate it fully clockwise, or push the
SPORT button in the center stack.
LOW (L) — IF EQUIPPED
Use this range for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, the
transmission will downshift for increased engine
braking. To access the LOW position, push down
on the gear selector and rotate it fully clockwise.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected
that could result in transmission damage,
Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this
mode, the transmission may operate only in
certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle
performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the
transmission may not re-engage if the engine is
turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the
more serious conditions, and indicate what actions
may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after
engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a
desired location (preferably, at an authorized
dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible.
If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
AutoStick — If Equipped
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving you
more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to
maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable
upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall
vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery
conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and
many other situations.
Operation
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT
mode, it will operate automatically, shifting
between the eight available gears. To engage
AutoStick, simply tap one of the steering
wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-) while in DRIVE
or SPORT mode. In DRIVE mode, this will activate a
temporary AutoStick mode. The transmission will
revert back to normal operation after a period of
time, depending on accelerator pedal activity.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the transmission gear selector is in the
SPORT position, tapping either shift paddle will
activate "permanent" AutoStick mode. The
transmission will remain in AutoStick mode until
the driver deliberately disables AutoStick (as
described below). Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick will
downshift the transmission to the next lower gear,
while using (+) to enter AutoStick will retain the
current gear. When AutoStick is active, the current
transmission gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Paddle Shifters
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition
would result. It will remain in the selected gear
until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except
as described below.
If AutoStick is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
transmission will automatically shift up when
maximum engine speed is reached. If the accel-
erator is fully depressed, the transmission will
downshift when possible (based on current
vehicle speed and gear). Lack of accelerator
pedal activity will cause the transmission to
revert to automatic operation.
If AutoStick is engaged while the transmission
gear selector is in the SPORT position, manual
gear selection will be maintained until the gear
selector is returned to DRIVE, or as described
below. The transmission will not upshift auto-
matically at redline in this mode, nor will down-
shifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is
pressed to the floor.
In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmis-
sion will automatically downshift as the vehicle
slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to
FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop,
the driver should manually upshift (+) the trans-
mission as the vehicle is accelerated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
SECOND gear. Tapping (+) at a stop will allow
starting in SECOND gear. Starting out in
SECOND gear can be helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too
low of a vehicle speed.
Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift
the transmission to the lowest gear possible at
the current speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode
if a fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, press and hold
the (+) shift paddle until "D" or "S" is once again
indicated in the instrument cluster. Shifting out of
SPORT mode will also disable AutoStick. You can
shift in or out of AutoStick mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
1 — Shift Paddle Downshift
2 — Shift Paddle Upshift
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
SPORT Mode Button
If your vehicle is equipped with SPORT mode, this
mode is a configuration set up for typical
enthusiast driving. The engine, transmission and
steering systems are all set to their SPORT
settings. SPORT Mode will provide improved
throttle response and modified shifting for an
enhanced driving experience, as well the greatest
amount of steering feel. This mode may be
activated and deactivated by pushing the
SPORT button on the instrument panel
switch bank.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by
shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders
during light load and cruise conditions. The system
is automatic with no driver inputs or additional
driving skills required.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
POWER STEERING
The Electric Power Steering system will give you
good vehicle response and increased ease of
maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will
vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking
and good feel while driving. If the electric steering
system experiences a fault that prevents it from
providing assist, you will still have the ability to
steer the vehicle manually.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be
selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to
”Customer Programmable Features” within
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
If the Electric Power Steering Fault
Warning Light is displayed and the
“SERVICE POWER STEERING” or the
“POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF –
SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed within the
instrument cluster display, this indicates the vehicle
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to
“Warning Lights And Messages” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low
speeds and during parking maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light is
displayed and the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM
OVER TEMP” message is displayed on the
instrument cluster screen, they indicate that
extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred
which caused an over temperature condition in the
power steering system. Once driving conditions are
safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few
moments until the Electric Power Steering Fault
Warning Light and message turn off.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control system takes
over accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h), or 20 mph (32 km/h)
depending on the powertrain used.
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control system has been designed to shut down if
multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control
system can be reactivated by pushing the Speed
Control On/Off button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
TO ACTIVATE
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed
Control. “CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in
the instrument cluster display to indicate the
Speed Control is on. To turn the system off, push
the on/off button a second time. “CRUISE
CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is off.
The system should be turned off when not in use.
TO SET A DESIRED SPEED
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Once a speed has been set, a message “CRUISE
CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)” will appear
indicating what speed was set. A cruise indicator
lamp, along with set speed will also appear and stay
on in the instrument cluster when the speed is set.
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accelerate
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decelerate
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always leave the system OFF when you
are not using it.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
TO VARY THE SPEED SETTING
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET
(+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed increment shown is
dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph)
or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+) button once will result in a
1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the button results in an increase of
1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+)
button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease
speed by pushing the SET
(-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed decrement shown is
dependent on the chosen speed unit of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(-) button once will result in a
1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(-) button once will result in a
1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease of
1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
TO ACCELERATE FOR PASSING
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When
the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the
set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
Speed Control.
TO RESUME SPEED
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
TO DEACTIVATE
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control without
erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button, or placing the ignition in
the OFF position, erases the set speed from
memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Speed Control without erasing the set speed from
memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while
traveling on highways and major roadways.
However, it is not a safety system and not designed
to prevent collisions.
Speed Control function
performs differently. Please refer to the proper
section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged
in light to moderate traffic conditions without
the constant need to reset your cruise control.
ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing
camera designed to detect a vehicle directly
ahead of you.
NOTE:
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of
you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC
will apply limited braking or accelerate (not to
exceed the original set speed) automatically to
maintain a preset following distance, while
matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining
an appropriate distance between vehicles.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for
cruising at a constant preset speed. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this section.
NOTE:
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react
to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the
mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise
Control buttons. The two control modes function
differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for active
driver involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic,
and weather conditions, vehicle speed,
distance to the vehicle ahead and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a
disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
O
PERATION
The Speed Control buttons (located on the right
side of the steering wheel) operate the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
NOTE:
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will affect the performance of the
Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision
Warning system.
ACTIVATING ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is
above 0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
displays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When you apply the brakes.
When the parking brake is applied.
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed
range.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold
the vehicle for two seconds in the stop
position. If the target vehicle does not
start moving within two seconds the
ACC system will display a message that
the system will release the brakes and
that the brakes must be applied manually.
An audible chime will sound when the
brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa-
tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway
off-ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have
steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving
at a constant speed.
WARNING!
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control On/Off
3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
4 — Distance Setting Decrease
5 — SET (+)/Accelerate
6 — RES/Resume
7 — SET (-)/Decelerate
8 — Distance Setting Increase
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the brakes are overheated.
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds.
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds.
TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again.
At this time, the system will turn off and the
instrument cluster displays “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
TO SET A DESIRED ACC SPEED
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push
the SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and
release. The instrument cluster display will display
the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is
set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in
front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you
do not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate
beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the instrument cluster display.
The system will not be controlling the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
The vehicle speed will only be determined by the
position of the accelerator pedal.
TO CANCEL
The following conditions cancel the system:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANC button is pushed.
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it to
go faster than you want. You could lose control
and have a collision. Always leave the system off
when you are not using it.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds.
Driver door is opened at low speeds.
NOTE:
If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than
two seconds, then the system will cancel and the
brake force will be ramped-out. The driver will have
to apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a stand-
still.
TO TURN OFF
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
is pushed.
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
button is pushed.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
TO RESUME
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES
(resume) button and then remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster
display will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
TO VARY THE ACC SPEED
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if equipped.
Refer to “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
for more information. The speed increment shown
is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+) button once will result in a
1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the button results in an increase of
1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The increase
in set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+)
button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a
set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too
sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased
by pushing the SET
(-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if equipped.
Refer to “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
for more information. The speed decrement
shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(-) button once will result in a
1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decre-
ments until the button is released. The decrease
in set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(-) button once will result in a
1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease of
1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET
(+) button
or SET
(-) button, the new set speed will be the
current speed of the vehicle.
When you use the SET
(-) button to decelerate, if
the engine’s braking power does not slow the
vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the
brake system will automatically slow the
vehicle.
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full
stop when following a target vehicle. When you
have ACC active and follow a target vehicle to a
standstill, after two seconds you will either have
to push the RES (resume) button, or apply the
accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the
existing set speed.
The ACC will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold the
vehicle for two seconds in the stop position. If
the target vehicle does not start moving within
two seconds, the ACC system will display a
message that the system will release the brakes
and that the brakes must be applied manually.
An audible chime will sound when the brakes
are released.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while climbing
uphill or descending downhill. This is normal
operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
SETTING THE FOLLOWING DISTANCE IN
ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set
by varying the distance setting between four bars
(longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and
one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the
distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance
setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting Increase button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting Decrease button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle
is detected in the same lane, the instrument
cluster displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator”
icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting,
regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above
the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages. (Refer to the informa-
tion on ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
Brake Alert
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the Forward
Collision Warning system is applying the brakes
autonomously.
OVERTAKE AID
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is
triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal (Lane Change Assist feature included) and
will only be active when passing on the left hand
side. Switching lanes will not impact the ACC
system if the driver is already traveling at the
set speed.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
3 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
ACC OPERATION AT STOP
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle
starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume
motion without the need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the
brakes will release. A cancel message will display
on the instrument cluster display and produce a
warning chime. Driver intervention will be required
at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the
driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop system
will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel
message will display on the instrument cluster
display and produce a warning chime. Driver
intervention will be required at this moment.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
M
ENU
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The instrument
cluster display is located in the center of the
instrument cluster. The information it displays
depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following appears in the instrument cluster
display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on
the steering wheel) is pushed, the display will read
“ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the
following:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity
DISPLAY WARNINGS AND
M
AINTENANCE
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system
performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may
also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and the system will deactivate.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels
with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The ACC
system will recover after the vehicle has left these
areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control is still available. For additional infor-
mation refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode” in this section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning
or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located
in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunc-
tion or failure and require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see an authorized
dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or after-
market grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC
system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is
no longer present, the system will return to the
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume
function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar
sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor
and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime
will indicate when conditions temporarily limit
system performance. This most often occurs at
times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy
rain and fog. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the
inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument
cluster display will display “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and the
system will have degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in adverse weather conditions. The
ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle has
left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its
path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rear view
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an
obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system will
return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and
forward facing camera inspected at an authorized
dealer.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required”
or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”,
there may be an internal system fault or a
temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem
persists, see an authorized dealer.
PRECAUTIONS WHILE DRIVING WITH
ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake
late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert
and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle
merging in from a side lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset
vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel,
which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no target
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the
curve the system will resume your original set
speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle
in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load,
traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills,
ACC performance may be limited.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely
in the lane in which you are traveling. In the
illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the
vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the
vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to take
action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if
necessary.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react
in situations where the vehicle you are following
exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in
your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply
the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE
C
ONTROL MODE
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is
available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is designed to
maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the
driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control
can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes,
push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button which turns the ACC and the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control off. Pushing the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button will
result in turning on (changing to) the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode, the system will not react to vehicles
ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does
not activate and no alarm will sound even if you
are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure
to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which
mode is selected.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has
been set a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO
MPH (km/h)” will appear indicating what speed
was set. This light will turn on when the system is
turned on via the on/off control. It turns green
when the cruise control is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is
set, you can increase speed by pushing the
SET
(+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed increment shown is
dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+) button once will result in a
1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the button results in an increase of
1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The increase
in set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+)
button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is
set, you can decrease speed by pushing the
SET
(-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed decrement shown is
dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric
(km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(-) button once will result in a
1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decre-
ments until the button is released. The decrease
in set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(-) button once will result in a
1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease of
1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the
memory:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANC button is pushed.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
The gear selector is removed from the
DRIVE position.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the
RES button and release. Resume can be used at
any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
button is pushed.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
is pushed.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between
the rear and/or front fascia and a detected
obstacle when backing up or moving forward (e.g.
during a parking maneuver). Refer to “ParkSense
System Usage Precautions” in this section for
limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the system state (enabled or
disabled) from the previous ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled at one of these gear selector positions,
the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. The system will become active
again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds
less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction,
depending on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from
the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction,
depending on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the
Customer Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and
the detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE, or
when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has
been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in one or more regions based
on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to
the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region,
the display will show a single solid arc in the center
rear region and will produce a one-half second
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the sound tone will change from
slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single flashing
arc in the left and/or right rear region and will
produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone
will change from fast to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region,
the display will show a single arc in the center front
region. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle. A fast sound tone will be produced
when reaching the second flashing arc and will
change to a continuous sound tone when the first
flashing arc appears.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
front region, the display will show a single flashing
arc in the left and/or right front region and will
produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone
will change from fast to continuous.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following charts show the warning alert
operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2-
Second Tone
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Fast
(for rear
center only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the
vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be
selected from the Customer Programmable
Features section of the Uconnect system, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
If the Uconnect system is equipped, chime volume
settings will not be accessible from the instrument
cluster display.
The chime volume settings include low, medium,
and high. The factory default volume setting is
medium.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
state through ignition cycles.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel
below the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument
cluster will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for approximately five seconds.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will show the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system
is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and
requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will
blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for
five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will
display a "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" pop up message for five
seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will
be displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either the
front or rear sensor location depending on where
the fault is detected. The system will continue to
provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning
properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if an object is
detected within the five second pop-up duration.
The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle
the ignition. If the message continues to appear
see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear bumpers are free
of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Further-
more, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains
off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the
ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off,
the instrument cluster will display “PARKSENSE
OFF” for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
the radio when it is sounding a tone.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle
is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers,
trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches
(30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a
close object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a
forward facing camera to detect lane markings and
measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied),
the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel
to prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries. If the driver continues to drift out of
the lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual
warning through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying torque to the steering wheel at
any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and
the driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides
visual warnings through the instrument cluster
display to prompt the driver to remain within the
lane. When only a single lane marking is detected,
a haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly is disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense.
WARNING!
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provides an
audible warning to the driver when the driver’s
hands are not detected on the steering wheel. The
system will cancel if the driver does not return their
hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The default status of LaneSense is off. The LED in
the LaneSense button will be illuminated when the
system is deactivated.
The LaneSense button is located on the center
stack below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push
the LaneSense button (LED turns off).
A “LaneSense On” message is shown in
the instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state, on or off, from the last ignition cycle when
the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument cluster
display.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display Screen
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines
are gray when both of the lane boundaries have
not been detected and the LaneSense telltale
is solid white.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the
LaneSense telltale is solid white when only
the left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left thick lane line flashes yellow
(on/off), the left thin line remains solid yellow
and the LaneSense telltale changes from
solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line,
Solid Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the
right lane marking has been detected.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been detected.
The LaneSense telltale is solid green when
both lane markings have been detected and the
system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the left thick lane line and left thin line
turn solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid green to solid yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in
the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example, if approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Lines/Solid Yellow Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left thick lane line flashes yellow
(on/off) and the left thin line remains solid
yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes from
solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time
torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example, if approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow
Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system settings can be configured
through the Uconnect system screen.
Follow these steps to change the LaneSense
settings:
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect touchscreen display.
2. Press the “Settings” button.
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button.
When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen,
you can configure the intensity of the torque
warning and the warning zone sensitivity (early/
medium/late) through the personalization
settings.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
The system will not apply torque to the steering
wheel whenever a safety system engages.
(Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control System,
Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision
Warning, etc.)
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your
vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The ParkView camera is located on the
rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate.
The image will be displayed in the touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds, this note will disappear.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
mable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
feature and it is turned on, the rear camera image
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds when the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. However, this
feature is canceled if the forward vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into PARK, the vehicle's ignition is
placed in the OFF position, or by pressing the
image defeat “X” button.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
Camera Delay turned off), the rear camera mode is
exited and the last touchscreen appears again.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and
its projected backup path based on the steering
wheel position. The active guide lines will show
separate zones that will help indicate the distance
to the rear of the vehicle.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera:
1. Press the "Controls" button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the "Backup Camera" button to turn the
Rear View Camera system on.
When manually activated, a counter will be
initiated after the vehicle speed is above 8 mph
(13 km/h). The rear view camera image will turn
off when this counter reaches 10 seconds. The
counter will be reset when the vehicle speed is
8 mph (13 km/h) or below.
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h),
the rear view camera image will continue to be
displayed until the transmission is shifted into PARK,
the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF position, or
the image defeat “X” button is pressed.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch
(located in the driver's door map pocket).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
Fuel Filler Location
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
It is recommended that the driver look
frequently over his/her shoulder when
backing up, especially in sunny weather condi-
tions, since there may be a glare from the sun
at certain angles that can make the image on
the touchscreen difficult to see.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on
the fuel door to break the ice buildup and
re-release the fuel door using the inside release
button. Do not pry on the door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside
the pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe –
the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door
while refueling.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Maintain nozzle in filler for five seconds to
allow nozzle to drain.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
NOTE:
A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow
for emergency refueling with a gas can.
Fuel Funnel
EMERGENCY FUEL FILLER DOOR
R
ELEASE
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use
the fuel filler door emergency release located in
the trunk.
Follow the steps below to open the fuel door in
case of an emergency:
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the access cover (located on the
left side inner trim panel).
Access Cover
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Pull the release cable.
Release Cable
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown
on the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This
information should be used for passenger and
luggage loading as indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR).
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label
affixed to the drivers side B-pillar or the rear of the
driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
Name of manufacturer
Month and year of manufacture
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Type of vehicle
Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to
read the VIN.
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and
cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do
not exceed the GVWR.
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR.
OVERLOADING
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide
satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed
the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and
ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale
to ensure that it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the
vehicle separately. It is important that you
distribute the load evenly over the front and rear
axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards
and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or
suspension components do not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving
condition can result if either rating is exceeded.
You could lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
LOADING
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its
empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store
heavier items down low and be sure you distribute
their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose
items securely before driving. If weighing the
loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded
either GAWR, but the total load is within the
specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles
and the way the brakes operate.
NOTE:
Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed
to the rear of the driver's door for your vehicle's
GVWR and GAWRs.
Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle's
proper tire pressure.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will
assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be limited
so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to
“Loading” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight
of all cargo, consumables, and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
entire weight of the trailer must be supported by
the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to
“Loading” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted
on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle
and have a collision.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) can be a mechanical
telescoping link that can be installed between the
hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically
provides adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies individual
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the
market today and they are commonly used to
tow small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer
tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and
the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with
the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a
more level ride, offering more consistent steering
and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and
a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling, stability,
braking performance, and could result in a
collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting
the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the
“Tire and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lbs (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) Max. Tongue Weight (See Note)
3.6L Automatic 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
5.7L Automatic 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And Loading Infor-
mation” placard for the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled
Servicing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper
maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading
can cause a loss of control, poor performance
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure
or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the
chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle
hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer
tongue and allow enough slack for turning
corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on
a grade. When parking, apply the parking
brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle
transmission in PARK. Always, block or
"chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
Max loading as defined on the “Tire and
Loading Information” placard.
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized.
WARNING!
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Main-
tenance” for proper tire inflation procedures.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires”
in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper
inspection procedure.
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking
and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer with
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
brake system, an electronic brake controller is
not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers
in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.
The engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your
brake system and cause it to fail. You might
not have brakes when you need them and
could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
distances.
WARNING!
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect)
into water.
Be sure to reconnect after clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area
located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you
can use the AutoStick shift control (if equipped) to
manually select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will
also provide better engine braking.
Speed Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Speed Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
disengage until you can get back to cruising
speed.
Use Speed Control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
AutoStick — If Equipped
When using the AutoStick shift control, select
the highest gear that allows for adequate perfor-
mance and avoids frequent downshifts. For
example, choose “5” if the desired speed can be
maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if needed to
maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle
speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at
high RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle
speed when grade and road conditions allow.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine
idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Temporarily turn off air conditioning.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the
ground, or using a tow dolly) is
NOT ALLOWED. The
only acceptable method for towing this vehicle
(behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with
all four wheels
OFF the ground.
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Information in this section will aid in safe
controlled launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to
pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon
occurs when there is a difference in the surface
traction under the rear (driving) wheels.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden
pulling of the front wheels. You could lose
control of the vehicle and possibly have a
collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible
for a wedge of water to build up between the tire
and road surface. This is known as hydroplaning
and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle
control and stopping ability. To reduce this
possibility, the following precautions should be
observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads
are slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
Replace tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a
collision in a sudden stop.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not
eliminate, the amount of wheel slip across a given
axle for improved handling.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following
Warnings and Cautions before doing so.
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm
run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road
or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink
into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or
rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases
stopping distances. Therefore, after driving
through standing water, drive slowly and
lightly press on the brake pedal several times
to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
(Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom
of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize
wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky
or foamy in appearance) after driving through
standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated,
as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause
serious internal damage to the engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
5
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located on
the switch bank just above the climate controls.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers
may discharge the battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an
ASSIST and a SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network. Other Uconnect
services will only be operable if your SiriusXM
Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™ features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect
features and SiriusXM Guardian™ services when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 187
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you
will be connected to a representative for assis-
tance. Roadside Assistance will know what
vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call
system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel
the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button
on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation
button on the Device Screen. Termination of the
SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the
Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and
SOS buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn
green once a connection to a SOS operator has
been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to a SOS operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call.
The vehicle brand.
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system to
determine if additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open
a voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occur-
ring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system will attempt to remain connected
with the SOS operator until the SOS oper-
ator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™ features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect
features and SiriusXM Guardian™ services when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
6
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
(Continued)
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico
DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any
of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between the
ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously illumi-
nate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately
and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable network and GPS antennas. You
could prevent operable network and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your
vehicle from placing an emergency call. An
operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after-
market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s
electrical system. This may prevent your
vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an
emergency call. To avoid interference that can
cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE
LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to fail
when you need it. You could be injured if the
air bag system is not there to help protect you.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean
you will not have SOS Call services. If the Rear-
view Mirror light is illuminated, have an autho-
rized dealer service the SOS Call system
immediately.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 189
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
or stop the SOS Call system operation. These
include, but are not limited to, the following
factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
are damaged during a crash.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavail-
able or obstructed.
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility.
Operator error by the SOS operator.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network conges-
tion.
Weather.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network connection and a GPS signal is
required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns
on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the
system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the Occupant Restraint Control system
immediately.
WARNING!
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™ features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect
features and SiriusXM Guardian™ services when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
6
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 191
BULB REPLACEMENT
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps 578
Visor Vanity Lamps A6220
Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped 194
Door Courtesy 562
Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
6
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen Headlamp) 9005HL+
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon Headlamp) D3S (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamp PSY24WSV
Front Park Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Daytime Running Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Side Marker Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Rear Side Marker Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Backup Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
License LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 193
REPLACING EXTERIOR BULBS
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Headlamps — If Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage
discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the
circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the
ignition turned to the OFF position.
Because of this,
you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when
the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue
to the lights. This diminishes and becomes more
white after approximately 10 seconds, as the
system charges.
Bi - Halogen Low Beam And High Beam
Headlamp — If Equipped
1. Open the hood.
NOTE:
Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access
the headlamp (outboard) bulb cap.
Headlamp Bulb Cap
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counter-
clockwise to unlock it.
4. Twist the headlamp bulb assembly counter-
clockwise, and then pull it out of the headlamp
assembly.
Headlamp Bulb Location
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring assembly
and install the replacement bulb.
6. Reinstall the bulb and wiring assembly into the
headlamp assembly, and then turn it
clockwise.
7. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the headlamp
housing and rotate it clockwise to lock it.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb
sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp
switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced
properly. See an authorized dealer for service.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
6
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the hood.
NOTE:
Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access
the turn signal (inboard) bulb cap.
Turn Signal Bulb Cap
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counter-
clockwise to unlock it.
Turn Signal Bulb Location
4. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb
socket and pull straight out from the lamp
assembly.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring connector
and install the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly
straight into the lamp until it locks in place.
7. Install the turn signal bulb cap in the headlamp
housing and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
Front Fog Lamp
The Front Fog Lamps use LED sources that are not
serviceable separately. The Front Fog Lamp must
be replaced as an assembly; see an authorized
dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not
serviceable separately. The Side Markers must be
replaced as an assembly, see an authorized
dealer.
Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps
The Rear Backup and Turn Signal Lamp use LED
sources that are not serviceable separately. The
Rear Lamps must be replaced as an assembly, see
an authorized dealer for further information.
License Lamp
The License Lamp uses an LED source that is not
serviceable separately. The License Lamp must be
replaced as an assembly; see an authorized
dealer.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL Lamp uses LED sources that are not
serviceable separately. The CHMSL Lamp must be
replaced as an assembly; see an authorized
dealer.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 195
FUSES
GENERAL INFORMATION
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check the
fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/
melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
UNDERHOOD FUSES
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in
the engine compartment. This module contains
fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and
descriptions are printed on the inside of the power
distribution center cover.
Front Power Distribution Center
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or
any other material. Do not place a fuse inside
a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems (engine system, transmission
system) or steering system blows, contact an
authorized dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/ functional fuse
element.
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/ not functional fuse
element (blown fuse).
6
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
1 – – Fuse – Spare
2 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
3 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #1 – If Equipped
4 30 Amp Pink – Starter
5 40 Amp Green – Anti-Lock Brake
6 30 Amp Pink – Anti-Lock Brake
7 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC #1
8 50 Amp Red / 20 Amp Blue – Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
9 – 20 Amp Yellow All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
10 – 10 Amp Red Intrusion MOD (300) – If Equipped / Under Hood Lamp – Police
11 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
12 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
13 – – Fuse – Spare
14 – – Fuse – Spare
15 – 20 Amp Yellow Left HID Headlamp – If Equipped
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 197
16 – 20 Amp Yellow Right HID Headlamp – If Equipped
18 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
19 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #2 – If Equipped
20 30 Amp Pink – Wiper Motor
21
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
–
Headlamp Washers – If Equipped
Police Bat Feed #2
22
40 Amp Green / 20 Amp
Blue – Police
– LTR Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Bat Feed # 3
23 20 Amp Blue – Police Bat Feed # 1
24 50 Amp Red / 20 Amp Blue – Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Ignition Run/ACC Feed # 3
28 – – Fuse – Spare
29 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module (Challenger / Charger Police)
30 – – Fuse – Spare
31 – 25 Amp Clear Engine Module
32 – – Fuse – Spare
33 – – Fuse – Spare
34 – 25 Amp Clear ASD Feed #1
35 – 20 Amp Yellow ASD Feed #2
36 – 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake Module / Steering Column Lock Module (300 if equipped)
37 – 10 Amp Red Engine Controller
38 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
39 – 10 Amp Red A/C Clutch / EPS – If Equipped / Vacuum Pump – If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
6
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
REAR INTERIOR FUSES
There is also a power distribution center located in
the trunk under the spare tire access panel. This
center contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity
location and descriptions are printed on the inside
of the power distribution center cover.
Rear Power Distribution Center
48 – 10 Amp Red AWD Module / Front Axle Disconnect – If Equipped
49 – – Fuse – Spare
50 – – Fuse – Spare
51 – 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump – If Equipped
52 – 5 Amp Tan Adaptive Cruise Control – If Equipped
53 – – Fuse – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure
to do so may allow water to get into the power
distribution center and possibly result in an
electrical system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other
than indicated may result in a dangerous elec-
trical system overload. If a properly rated fuse
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the
circuit that must be corrected.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 199
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
F2 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #1
F3 – – Fuse – Spare
F4 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #2
F5
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
– Sunroof/Dome Lamp – Police
F6 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #1
F7 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #2
F8 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lighting
F9 40 Amp Green – Power Locks
F10 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Control Module
F11 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Control Module
F12 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter/IP APO/RR USB (Selectable Fuse)– If Equipped
F15 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower
F16 20 Amp Blue – Left Spot Lamp – Police
F17 20 Amp Blue – Right Spot Lamp – Police
F18 30 Amp Pink – VISM Mod (Police)
F19 – – Fuse – Spare
F20 – – Fuse – Spare
F21 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump (Non 6.2L SRT)
6
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F22 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Gateway Module
F23 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door – If Equipped/Diagnostic Port
F24 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack
F25 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor System
F26 – 15 Amp Blue Trans Mod (Charger Non- Police/300)
F27 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier – If Equipped
F31 – 25 Amp Breaker Power Seats – If Equipped
F32 – 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module/Cluster
F33 – 15 Amp Blue IGN SW/Wireless Mod/Steer Clmn Lock Mod/Remote Start — If Equipped
F34 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Module/Clock (300)
F35 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
F36 – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Exhaust Valve – If Equipped
F37 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio
F38 – 20 Amp Yellow Media Hub / Console APO
F40 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump #1 (6.2L ADR)
F41 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump #2 (6.2L ADR)
F42 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defrost
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats – If Equipped / Heated Steering Wheel – If Equipped
F44 – 10 Amp Red Park Assist / Blind Spot / Rear View Camera
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 201
F45 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster / Rearview Mirror / Lane Departure
F46 – – Fuse – Spare
F47 – 10 Amp Red Adaptive Front Lighting / Day Time Running Lamps – If Equipped
F48 – 20 Amp Yellow Active Suspension – (6.4L*/ 6.2L)
F49 – – Fuse – Spare
F50 – – Fuse – Spare
F51 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated / Vented Seats – If Equipped
F52 – 10 Amp Red Heated/Cooled Cup Holders/Rear Heated Seat Switches – If Equipped
F53 – 10 Amp Red HVAC Module/In Vehicle Temperature Sensor
F54 – – Fuse – Spare
F55 – – Fuse – Spare
F56 – – Fuse – Spare
F57 – – Fuse – Spare
F58 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F59 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals – Police
F60 – – Fuse – Spare
F61 – – Fuse – Spare
F62 – – Fuse – Spare
F63 – – Fuse – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
6
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
JACK LOCATION/SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an
access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to
access the jack and spare tire.
NOTE:
The spare tire must be removed in order to access
the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
F64 – 25 Amp Breaker Rear Windows (Charger/300)
F65 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F66 – – Fuse – Spare
F67 – 10 Amp Red
Rain and Light Sensor / Sunroof / Inside RearView Mirror /
Police Run Acc Relay
F68 – 10 Amp Red Rear USB Timer / Rear Sunshade – If Equipped
F69 – – Fuse – Spare
F70 – – Fuse – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack.
If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 203
3. Rotate the fastener securing the spare tire
counterclockwise to remove it.
Spare Tire Fastener
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Rotate the fastener securing the jack counter-
clockwise to remove it.
Jack Fastener
6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly
from under the spare tire. Turn the jack screw
to the left to loosen the lug wrench, and
remove the wrench from the jack assembly.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid
ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
6
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
JACKING AND CHANGING A TIRE
Jacking Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the
center cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug
wrench to pry the center cap off carefully
before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts
counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
Jacking Locations
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
to be raised.
Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle
when it is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
WARNING!
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 205
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is
closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw
clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with
the lift area of the sill flange.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide
the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the
flat tire and install the spare tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
6
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
7. Mount the spare tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to
install a center cap or wheel cover on the
compact spare.
Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to
“Limited-Use Spare” under “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for additional
warnings, cautions, and information about
the spare tire, its use, and operation.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the lug nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten
the lug nuts.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the
jack handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a
star pattern until each nut has been tightened
twice. For the correct lug nut torque, refer to
“Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications” in
“Technical Specifications”. If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them checked with
a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at
a service station.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the
base of the jack faces the front of the vehicle
before tightening down the fastener.
ROAD TIRE INSTALLATION
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the
jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifi-
cations” in “Technical Specifications” for
proper lug nut torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all
lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare
tire in the places provided. Have the deflated
(flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 207
(Continued)
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the
procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer's operating instructions and
precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery is stored under an access cover in the
trunk. Remote battery posts are located on the
right side of the engine compartment for jump
starting.
Jump Starting Locations
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and cycle the ignition
to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables’ reach, set the parking brake and make
sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system voltage
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
starter motor, alternator or electrical system may
occur.
Remote Positive (+) Post
Remote Negative (-) Post
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be
injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
6
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
cables are not contacting each other or either
vehicle while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive
(+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive
(+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The ground
must be away from the battery and the fuel
injection system.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper
cables in the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-) end of the jumper
cable from the remote negative
(-)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive
(+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post
of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote
positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charging
system tested at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 rpm since it provides no charging benefit,
wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle
engine.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 209
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
The fuel filling procedure for in case of an
emergency is described in the “Emergency Gas
Can Refueling” procedure. Refer to “Refueling The
Vehicle” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel. If
refueling is necessary, while using an approved
gas can, please insert the refueling funnel into the
filler neck opening.
Refueling Funnel
Inserting Funnel
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce
the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the
engine idle speed while preventing vehicle
motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling
system and turning the A/C off can help remove
this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear
continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
6
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
To move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a
depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the console storage bin to access the
Manual Park Release lever.
Manual Park Release Cover
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish
the tether strap up through the opening in the
console base.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the
center of the lever, and disengage the lever
locking tab by pushing it to the right.
Engaging The Lever
6. While holding the locking tab in the
disengaged position, pull the tether strap to
rotate the lever up and rearward, until it locks
in place in the vertical position. The vehicle is
now out of PARK and can be moved. Release
the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake before activating the Manual Park
Release. In addition, you should be seated in the
driver's seat with your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when activating the Manual Park Release.
Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 211
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the
rear side) rearward (away from the lever) to
unlatch the lever.
Disengaging The Lever
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward
and down, to its original position, until the
locking tab snaps into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm
that the lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the
console. Reinstall the console storage bin.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels.
Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion,
without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake
pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Push the "ESC OFF" switch, to place the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial
Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Safety”
for further information. Once the vehicle has
been freed, push the "ESC OFF" switch again to
restore "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and
tires. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping when
you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of transmis-
sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
fast may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not
spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while
in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
6
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars
and other equipment designed for this purpose,
following equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar
or other towing device to main structural members
of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated
brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's battery
is discharged, refer to "Manual Park Release" in
this section for instructions on shifting the
transmission out of PARK for towing.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground RWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h)
max speed
• 30 miles (48 km)
max distance
NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
NOT RECOMMENDED (but, if used,
same limitations as above)
NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED
NOT RECOMMENDED, but, if used:
Ignition in ON/RUN mode
Transmission in
NEUTRAL (NOT in PARK)
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may
result from improper towing.
The manufacturer does not recommend
towing this vehicle using a tow dolly.
Vehicle damage may occur.
CAUTION!
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 213
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) MODELS
The manufacturer recommends towing your
vehicle with all four wheels
OFF the ground using a
flatbed.
If the transmission and driveline are operable,
AWD models can also be towed with the ignition in
the ON/RUN mode, the transmission in NEUTRAL
(N) (not in PARK!), and the rear wheels
OFF the
ground with no limitation on speed or distance.
Since the ignition MUST be in the ON/RUN mode to
tow in this manner, AWD vehicles must be towed
with ALL FOUR wheels
OFF the ground (e.g. on a
flatbed truck) if the key fob is unavailable.
REAR-WHEEL DRIVE (RWD) MODELS
The manufacturer recommends towing your
vehicle with all four wheels
OFF the ground using a
flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, this vehicle may be flat
towed (with all four wheels on the ground) under
the following conditions:
The automatic transmission must be in
NEUTRAL (N). Refer to “Manual Park Release”
in this section for instructions on shifting the
transmission to NEUTRAL when the engine
is off.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles
(48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle
must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
farther than 30 miles (48 km), then the only
acceptable method of towing is with a flatbed
truck.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Enhanced
Accident Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Event Data
Recorder (EDR).
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle using any other method
can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
6
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
This vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator
system will remind you that it is time to take your
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for the vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,
trailer tow, and extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures will influence when the “Change Oil”
or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as
3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the
next 500 miles (805 km).
The “Oil Change Required” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is
necessary.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
by someone other than an authorized dealer, the
message can be reset by referring to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off-road environment, or is
operated predominantly at idle or only very low
engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is considered
Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear
or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before your
next scheduled service.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and power steering
(if equipped) and fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 215
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Required Maintenance Intervals:
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
Inspect the CV/Universal joints
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals, and replace if
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid
(All Wheel Drive Only).
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc
brakes.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only). X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 217
(Continued)
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low
engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is considered
Severe Duty.
Change the transfer case fluid; if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
(All Wheel Drive Only).
X X
Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel
Drive (AWD) change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of
the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
X X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equip-
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunc-
tion and effect vehicle handling and perfor-
mance. This could cause an accident.
WARNING!
7
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 219
5.7L ENGINE
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the
oil level at regular intervals, such as every month.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about
five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut
off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are three possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading
is at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the
oil level to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in
the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to
check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a
few seconds to flush out the residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply
some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the
wiper blades clean. This will help blade
performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture
that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
your climate. This rating information can be found
on most washer fluid containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters)
of washer fluid when the message “Low Washer
Fluid” appears in the instrument cluster.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never have to add water, nor is
periodic maintenance required.
NOTE:
The battery is stored under an access cover in the
trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump starting. Refer to
“Jump Starting Procedures” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could
damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output greater than 12 Volts.
Do not allow cable clamps to touch each
other.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 221
PRESSURE WASHING
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you
that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in
this section for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only
be replaced with a battery of the same type
(vented).
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is attached
to the positive post and the negative cable is
attached to the negative post. Battery posts
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Cable
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
cables before connecting the charger to the
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting voltage.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Cleaning the engine compartment with a
high pressure washer is not recommended.
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Oil Selection — 3.6L And 5.7L
Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils that
are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-6395.
NOTE:
Hemi engines (5.7L) at times can tick right after
startup and then quiet down after approximately
30 seconds. This is normal and will not harm the
engine. This characteristic can be caused by short
drive cycles. For example, if the vehicle is started
then shut off after driving a short distance. Upon
restarting, you may experience a ticking sound.
Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused for
an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended
oil changes or extended idling. If the engine
continues to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on, see the nearest authorized
dealer
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been
certified by the American Petroleum
Institute (API). The manufacturer only
recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L
Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Shell Helix Ultra or equivalent is recommended for
all operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel
economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine.
For information on engine oil filler cap location,
refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in
this section.
NOTE:
Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Shell Helix Ultra or equivalent may be used when
SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not
available.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity
grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 5.7L
Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Shell Helix Ultra or equivalent is recommended for
all operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel
economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine.
For information on engine oil filler cap location,
refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in
this section.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in
improper operation of the Fuel Saver Technology.
Refer to “Fuel Saver Technology – If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity
grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals for
oil and filter changes are followed.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 223
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
the addition of any additives (other than leak
detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
problem to the environment. Contact an
authorized dealer, service station or governmental
agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for
replacement. The quality of replacement filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should
be used to ensure most efficient service. Mopar
engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are
recommended.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for
the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters
should be used to ensure most efficient service.
Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a high quality
filter and are recommended.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This
service should include cleaning of the condenser
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
lubricants can cause the system to fail,
requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
Information Book, for further warranty infor-
mation.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines
to be disconnected should be done by an
experienced technician.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a — If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
rocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly
substance. The manufacturer recommends that
air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer or other service facilities using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydroflu-
oroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using recovery
and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the
hood, behind a removable panel in the cowl on the
passenger side of the vehicle, next to the
windshield wipers. When installing a new filter,
ensure its proper orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by
pressing the retaining clips.
Access Door
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access
cover.
Filter Access Cover
3. Remove the used filter.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 225
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of
the vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will
indicate this).
A/C Air Filter
5. Close the filter access cover.
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for
the proper maintenance intervals.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from
rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a
reason to replace belt. However, cracks running
along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt
with cracks running along a rib must be replaced.
Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear,
frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated
from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem
before new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble
is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive
belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could be
injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equip-
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with
a lithium based grease, such as Mopar Spray
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper
function. When performing other underhood
services, the hood latch, release mechanism and
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into
the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine
oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chat-
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of
these conditions are present, clean the wiper
blades or replace as necessary.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full
up position.
Windshield Wiper Arm
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 227
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the locking tab.
Wiper Locking Assembly
3. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base
of the wiper arm.
4. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the
wiper arm with one hand and separating the
wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other
hand (move the wiper blade down toward the
base of the wiper arm and away from the J
hook in the end of the wiper arm).
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the
tip of the wiper arm with the wiper locking tab
open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper
assembly into the hook on the tip of the arm
through the opening in the wiper blade under
the locking tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade onto the arm until motion
stops, then fold down the locking tab to
secure.
NOTE:
The locking tab will not snap into place until the
blade is properly positioned on the wiper arm hook.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
technician inspect the complete exhaust system
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper
2 — Wiper Arm J Hook
3 — Locking Tab
7
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor
may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should
be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the igni-
tion when the transmission is in gear and the
vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diag-
nostic testing, or for prolonged periods during
very rough idle or malfunctioning operating
conditions.
NOTE:
Your vehicle’s exhaust system may be equipped
with an Electronic Exhaust Valve (EEV) system, if
the exhaust system is replaced with aftermarket
products a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will
illuminate.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
scious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips” in
“Safety” for further information.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such mate-
rials might be grass or leaves coming into
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park
or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can
burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
emissions control device and may seriously
reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction
could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter
and vehicle.
CAUTION!
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 229
COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather,
where applicable). If the engine coolant
(antifreeze) is dirty, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized
dealer. Check the front of the radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the
connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system
please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant
(antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for
the proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protec-
tion. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant is different and should not be mixed
with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT
engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into
the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming
to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until the
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
cooling system pressure cap when the radi-
ator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may
start at any time, whether the engine is
running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-
tion to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the igni-
tion is in the ON mode.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze)
can be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important that you use the same engine coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout
the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that
meets the requirements of FCA Material Stan-
dard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed
70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are
anticipated. Please contact an authorized
dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower
quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the
area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system, please contact a local authorized
dealer.
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
recommended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain,
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that
engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the
radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
is any accumulation of foreign material on the
sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine the
disposal rules for your community. To prevent
ingestion by animals or children, do not store
ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers
or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills
immediately.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
Heat causes pressure to build up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 231
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method
for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine off and cold, the level of the engine
coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be
between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so
there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant
pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant
(antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolant.
Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the
coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is
needed to maintain the proper level, only OAT
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to
the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-
meters of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment.
This is normally a result of moisture from rain,
snow, or high humidity accumulating on the
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the
contents of the coolant expansion bottle must
also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions
are required, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentra-
tion at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water
for proper corrosion protection of your engine
which contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor
gas mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all
brake system components should be inspected
periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in
this section for the proper maintenance intervals.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder
immediately if the Brake System Warning Light
indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when
performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to
the top of the “FULL” mark on the side of the
master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it
may cause leaking in the system.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
would not have your full braking capacity in an
emergency.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the
requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. However,
low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a
checkup may be needed.
Use only brake fluid that has been recommended
by the manufacturer, and has been kept in a tightly
closed container to avoid contamination from
foreign matter or moisture.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use only the manufacturer's specified
transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for fluid
specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for further informa-
tion. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can
severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of
brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on
the original factory installed hydraulic master
cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep
the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at
all times. Brake fluid in a open container
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its
contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contam-
inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
could be damaged, causing partial or
complete brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder. Refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for fluid
specifications.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 233
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
using any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do
not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The All Wheel Drive system consists of a transfer
case and front differential. The exterior surface of
these components should be inspected for
evidence of fluid leaks. Confirmed leaks should be
repaired as soon as possible.
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is
located in the middle of the rear housing. To
inspect the transfer case fluid level, remove the
fill/inspection plug. The fluid level should be even
with the bottom of the hole. Use this plug to add
fluid as required.
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer
cover near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect
the differential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The
fluid level should be even with or slightly below the
bottom of the hole.
Fluid Changes
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
REAR AXLE
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are
not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other
reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly
should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is
suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
station.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage your
transmission components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
“S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on
US design standards and it begins with the
tire diameter molded into the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 235
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
7
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 237
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured.
Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
7
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum
of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the
tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 239
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information placard in
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading,
and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the
“Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. The combined weight of
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
configurations and number and size of occu-
pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
865 lbs (392 kg).
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 241
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
can cause damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 243
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after
sitting for a minimum of 3 hours. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change.
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure
inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature
condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will
be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You could
have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision.
Always use radial ply tires in sets of four.
Never combine them with other types of tires.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire
is changed after being driven under run flat mode
14 psi (96 kPa) condition, please replace the TPMS
sensor as it is not designed to be reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more
information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires
should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Failure to follow this warning can result in
sudden tire failure. You could lose control and
have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to
the Tire and Loading Information placard or the
Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
“Tire Safety Information” section of this manual for
more information relating to the Load Index and
Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and
ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season tires.
All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient
temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads
are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for your
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre-
dictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire over-
loading and failure. You could lose control and
have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire
sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original
equipment tires. Use snow tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an
authorized tire dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice,
skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires.
Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore,
local laws should be checked before using these
tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in
“Starting And Operating” for restrictions when
towing with a spare tire designated for temporary
emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If
your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
conditions also creates the possibility of loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with a compact or limited use temporary
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump before
lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire
needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or
a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome Cleaner
or their equivalent is recommended or select a
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive
more than the speed listed on the limited use
spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressures listed on your Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel
cleaners and automatic car washes may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
(Continued)
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
TIRE CHAINS AND TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following traction devices are recommended.
Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
Traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the traction device
manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with a tire chain or traction device.
Install on rear tires only.
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) Models: For a P215/
65R17 and P225/60R18 use of Peerless Chain
Super Z6 low profile traction device or equiva-
lent is recommended.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models: For a P235/
55R19 tire, use of an S Class traction device or
equivalent is recommended.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For these
reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
or polishing compounds. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain
this finish.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can cause
unpredictable handling. You could lose control
and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe
the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only traction
devices in good condition are used. Broken
devices can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before
further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed of
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than
30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION!
7
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as
those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper maintenance
intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some directional
tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more
than 21 days, you may want to take these steps to
protect your battery.
NOTE:
SRT (if equipped), storage between 21-60 days
can use Storage Mode rather than disconnecting
the battery. Storage Mode can be found in the
instrument cluster display under vehicle info/
battery page.
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
make roads passable in snow and ice and those
that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must
be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a
mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with clear water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super
Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of
such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec-
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
as possible. The cost of such repairs is consid-
ered the responsibility of the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon
as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up
paint to match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken
the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar Total Clean,
a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not
remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them.
Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or
if the buckles do not work properly.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and
if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 253
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching
the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap
is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER PARTS
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage
the leather upholstery and should be removed
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather
conditioner is not required to maintain the original
condition.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is
designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recommends
Mopar total care leather cleaner applied on a cloth
to clean the leather seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an
abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning
the inside rear window equipped with electric
defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays,
or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e.,
bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
interior may cause permanent damage.
Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
seats, as damage to the seat may result.
7
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the
left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is
visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield.
Windshield VIN Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose
normal capability, the remaining system will still
function. There will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. This may be evident by increased
pedal travel during application, greater pedal force
required to slow or stop, and potential activation of
the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(for example, repeated brake applications with the
engine OFF), the brakes will still function. The
effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power system
operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
before tightening.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 255
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt
(do not insert it halfway).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an authorized
dealer or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
Torque Patterns
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
excellent fuel economy and performance
when using high-quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having an octane rating of
87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
higher octane “Premium” gasoline will not provide
any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these
engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from
the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if
the engine is heard making a heavy knocking
sound, see an authorized dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than
87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
8
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
5.7L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater
than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to
89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
89 octane “Plus” gasoline is recommended for
optimum performance and fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from
the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if
the engine is heard making a heavy knocking
sound, see an authorized dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than
87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
provide improved performance and durability of
engine and fuel system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
further aide in minimizing engine and
fuel system deposits. When available,
the usage of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is
recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a
list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials
intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed
the applicable standard, and/or cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 257
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15).
Use of gasoline with higher ethanol content may
void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component corro-
sion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run
on Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or
Liquid Propane (LP) may result in damage
to the engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT IN GASOLINE
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive
that is blended into some gasolines to increase
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no
performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline
blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
8
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
engine performance and damage the emis-
sions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent
burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may
require immediate service. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
mended. Most of these products contain high
concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in
a parked vehicle with the engine running for
an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in
an open area with the engine running for more
than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the
vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 259
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
5.7L Engine 89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/
2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula or equivalent)
10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
5.7L Engine – without Severe Duty II Cooling System (Mopar Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula or equivalent)
14.5 Quarts 13.9 Liters
5.7L Engine – with Severe Duty II Cooling System (Mopar Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula or equivalent)
15 Quarts 14.3 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
8
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
ENGINE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil,
and Shell Helix Ultra. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method,
0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 261
CHASSIS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission — 8-Speed Transmission
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid,
or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703.
Front Axle – AWD (If Equipped)
We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90
(API GL-5).
Rear Axle
We recommend you use Mopar OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85
(API GL-5).
Transfer Case – AWD (If Equipped)
We recommend you use Mopar Transfer Case Lubricant for
BorgWarner 44–40.
8
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
system, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may
be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a
computer or other devices, your vehicle may
require software updates to improve the usability
and performance of your systems or to reduce the
potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security breach,
vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(U.S. Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer
to “Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement or “Onboard
Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems
are breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD)
into your vehicle if it came from a trusted
source. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized dealer immediately.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
MULTIMEDIA 263
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the Customer Programmable Features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/
Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn
the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings. Push the center of the control
knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off
and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or
tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES —
U
CONNECT 4C/4C NAV SETTINGS
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons On
The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
Press the Apps button, then press the Settings
button on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode, the Uconnect system
allows you to access all of the available
programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in
the desired mode, press and release the preferred
setting option until a check mark appears next to
the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Once the setting is complete, press the
X button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
button on the right side of the screen will allow you
to toggle up or down through the available settings.
The following tables list the settings that may be
found within the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV radio, along
with the selectable options pertaining to each
setting.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
9
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 MULTIMEDIA
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Français Español
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness Headlights ON + –
NOTE:
When in the “Display Brightness Headlights ON” display, you may select the brightness with the headlights on.
To make changes to the "Display Brightness Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or
"parade" position.
Display Brightness Headlights OFF + –
NOTE:
When in the “Display Brightness Headlights OFF” display, you may select the brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with
the + and – buttons on the touchscreen.
To make changes to the "Display Brightness Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or
"parade" position.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
MULTIMEDIA 265
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, you may select each unit of measure independently displayed in the instrument cluster display, and
navigation system (if equipped). The following selectable units of measurement are listed below:
Set Theme List Of Options
NOTE:
When in the “Set Theme” display, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the Set Theme button on the touchscreen,
then select the desired theme option button until a check mark appears showing that the setting has been selected.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Control Screen Timeout — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Timeout” feature is selected, the controls screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the feature
deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the Instrument Cluster Display as the vehicle
approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Custom” option allows you to set the “Speed” (MPH, or km/h), “Distance” (mi, or km), “Fuel Consumption” [MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100 km, or km/L],
“Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C, or °F) units of measurement independently.
9
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never w/Help Always
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Sync Time With GPS” feature will allow you to automatically have the radio set the time.
Set Time Hours + –
Set Time Minutes + –
Time Format
12 hrs 24 hrs
AM PM
Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Show Time In Status Bar” feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
MULTIMEDIA 267
Camera
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds
after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK,
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width
of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
9
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
This setting may have to be accessed by selecting the “Automatic Emergency Braking” setting first.
Forward Collision Warning
Sensitivity — If Equipped
Near Far
NOTE:
The FCW Sensitivity feature provides an audible and/or visual warning to potential forward collisions. The feature can be can be set to “Far”, or set to “Near”.
The default status of FCW Sensitivity is the “Far” setting. This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you
are farther away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change the setting for more dynamic driving, select the “Near” setting. This warns you of a possible
collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you.
This setting may have to be accessed by selecting the “Automatic Emergency Braking” setting first.
Forward Collision Warning Active
Braking — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests
insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make your selection, press the Forward
Collision Warning Active Braking button on the touchscreen, until a check mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
This setting may have to be accessed by selecting the “Automatic Emergency Braking” setting first.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
MULTIMEDIA 269
LaneSense Warning — If Equipped Early Med Late
NOTE:
When the “LaneSense Warning” feature is selected, it sets the distance at which the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential lane departures.
LaneSense Strength — If Equipped Low Med High
NOTE:
When the “LaneSense Strength” feature is selected, it sets the strength of the steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound & Display
NOTE:
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h).
It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with “Sound Only” or “Sound & Display”.
To change the ParkSense status, press and release the Sound Only or Sound & Display option.
Front ParkSense Volume Low Med High
NOTE:
The Front ParkSense Volume settings can be selected from the Uconnect System. The chime volume settings include “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
The factory default volume setting is Medium. ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Med High
NOTE:
The Rear ParkSense Volume settings can be selected from the Uconnect System. The chime volume settings include “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”. ParkSense
will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
Power Steering Default — If Equipped Normal Sport Comfort
NOTE:
When the “Electronic Power Steering Default” is selected, it allows you to change the default setting of your vehicle to “Normal”, “Sport”, or “Comfort”.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 MULTIMEDIA
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert
feature can be activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in
the exterior mirrors. When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the BSM will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as sound an audible alert when
the turn signal is on.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become
misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to
specification.
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active.
Paddle Shifters — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
MULTIMEDIA 271
Mirrors & Wipers
After pressing the Mirrors & Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Side Mirror In Reverse” feature is selected, the exterior sideview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position and the
transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected and the wipers are on, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield.
9
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
Headlight Illumination On Approach
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country
of the vehicle purchase.
Steering Directed Lights — If Equipped On Off
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
MULTIMEDIA 273
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and
the driver's door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob, or when using the
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start On Off
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When "Driver Door" is programmed with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver's door will unlock with the first press of the key fob unlock button.
You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors. When "All Doors" is programmed for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors
will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button.
If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped.
If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door”
is programmed, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
9
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the Seats & Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. To make your
selection, press the Passive Entry button on the touchscreen, until a check mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
Personal Settings Linked To
Key Fob — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station
pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
The seat returns to the memorized seat location (if “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” is set to on) when the key fob is used to unlock the door.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Dr Heat/Vent Seat &
Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start —
If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver's heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40°F (4.4°C).
When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C), the driver’s vented seat will turn on.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
MULTIMEDIA 275
Key Off Options
After pressing the Key Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, the driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
Key Off Power Delay
0 sec 45 sec
5 mins 10 mins
NOTE:
When the “Key Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped), dual-pane power sunroof
(if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
To change the Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the + or - button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval, and choose from “0 seconds,”
“45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes.”
Headlight Off Delay
0 30
60 90
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the
vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Delay status press the + or – button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.
9
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Speaker Icon Arrow Buttons
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the Speaker Icon, use the arrows to adjust, or tap the
Speaker Icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer + –
NOTE:
The “Equalizer” feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid, and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen or
by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen.
Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume —
If Equipped
Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the Off, 1, 2 or
3 button on the touchscreen.
Surround Sound —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To make your selection, press the Surround Sound button on the touchscreen,
select On or Off.
AUX Volume Offset —
If Equipped
-3 +3
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
MULTIMEDIA 277
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. To make your selection,
press the AUX Volume Match button on the touchscreen, choose a level from -3 to +3.
Auto Play On Off
NOTE:
The Auto Play feature allows an media device to begin playing when the media device is plugged in. To make your selection, press the On or Off button to
activate or deactivate Auto Play.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (Both, Text, Call), Auto Reply Message (Custom, Default) and
Custom Auto Reply Message (Create Message).
Paired Phones And Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones And Audio Devices” feature shows which phones or media devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information,
refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
AutoShow Smartphone Display Upon Connection —
If Equipped
On Off
Smartphone Projection Manager On Off
9
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
Channel Skip Name of Channel
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to skip channels. To make your selection, press the Channel Skip button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would
like to skip.
Subscription Information Subscription Info
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the
free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Information button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE:
SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
MULTIMEDIA 279
Reset
After pressing the Reset button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
System Information — If Equipped
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings to Default OK Cancel X
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the Restore Settings button
on the touchscreen. A pop-up will appear asking "Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order OK Cancel
Restore Apps — If Equipped OK Cancel
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel X
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove personal information, press the Clear
Personal Data button and a pop-up will appear asking "Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?”.
Modem Reset — If Equipped OK Cancel
Setting Name Selectable Options
Software License System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying the system software version.
9
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on
the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three
and nine o’clock positions.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center and controls the
volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing
the top of the rocker switch will increase the
volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM/AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on which
mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode.
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the
next listenable station and pushing the bottom of
the switch will “Seek” down for the next listenable
station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that you
have programmed in the radio preset button.
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next
track on the selected media (USB/Bluetooth®).
Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning
of the previous track if it is within eight seconds
after the current track begins to play.
NOTE:
While In Media Mode, the center button on the left
rocker switch is nonfunctional.
AUX/USB CONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB Port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information, refer
to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
AUX/USB Ports
1 — USB 1 Port
2 — AUX Jack
3 — USB 2 Port
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
MULTIMEDIA 281
Located on the rear of the front center console are
dual USB “Charge Only” ports.
Rear USB Charging Ports
The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery
operated USB devices when connected.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
performance from your radio. This condition may
be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile
phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the
radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume
be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless
radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio
will be used in such a manner that the radio is
8 inches (20 cm) or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers.
The level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux
CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
9
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 MULTIMEDIA
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment gener-
ates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accor-
dance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following
measures:
a. Increase the separation between the equip-
ment and receiver.
b. Consult an authorized dealer or an experi-
enced radio technician for help.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
INTRODUCING UCONNECT
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
Commands and tips you need to know to control
your Uconnect system.
NOTE:
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the
Apps menus, of your touchscreen, you have the
Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 4C system.
GET STARTED
All you need to control your Uconnect system with
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile
device and feature compatibility and to find
phone pairing instructions.
Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may
impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead. The microphone is
positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at
the driver.
Each time you give a Voice Command, you must
first push either the Voice Recognition (VR) or
Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and
saying a Voice Command from the current cate-
gory.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
MULTIMEDIA 283
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session
“
Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the
touchscreen.
RADIO
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like
to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio trial required).
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“
Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP:
At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the
VR button and say “
Help.” The system
provides you with a list of commands.
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call,
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio, Media,
Or Climate Functions. For Uconnect 4C NAV
System Only: Push To Begin Navigation Function
3 — Push To End Call
9
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®
and auxiliary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is
only available for connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of
the following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
“
Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest
Hits”; “
Play song Moonlight Sonata”;
“
Play genre Classical”
TIP:
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see
all of the music on your USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist,
album, song and genre information is displayed.
PHONE
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is
ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile
phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one
of the following commands:
“
Call John Smith”
“Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts”
“
Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”
“Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)”
TIP:
When providing a Voice Command, push the
Phone button and say “
Call”, then pronounce
the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book.
When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you
can say “
Call John Smith work”.
VOICE TEXT REPLY
Uconnect announces incoming text messages.
Push the Phone button and say “
Listen.” (Must
have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect
system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to
you, push the Phone button
. After the
beep, say: “
Reply
.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages
and follow the system prompts.
TIP:
Your mobile phone must have the full implemen-
tation of the
Message Access Profile (MAP) to take
advantage of this feature. For details about MAP,
visit
UconnectPhone.com.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
MULTIMEDIA 285
Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on
your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s®
“User Manual”.
TIP:
Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone®,
but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri® Eyes Free,
you can use your voice to send a text message.
CLIMATE
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control).
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of
the following commands:
“
Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP:
Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated
seats or steering wheel if equipped.
NAVIGATION (4C NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save
time and become more productive when you know
exactly how to get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the
VR button
. After the beep, say:
“
Find address
800 Chrysler Drive
Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP:
To start a POI search, push the VR button .
After the beep, say: “
Find nearest coffee shop”.
SIRI® EYES FREE — IF EQUIPPED
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages,
select media, place phone calls and much more.
Siri uses your natural language to understand what
you mean and responds back to confirm your
requests. The system is designed to keep your
eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel by
letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep you
can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications
from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep
your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For
your convenience, there is a counter display to
keep track of your missed calls and text messages
while you were using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both, when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to
you shortly.”
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.
9
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 MULTIMEDIA
ANDROID AUTO™ — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™
features may or may not be available in every
region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice recognition
system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to
project your Android™-powered smartphone and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android™ 6.0 or
higher to one of the media USB ports, using the
factory-provided USB cable, and press the new
Android Auto™ icon that replaces your “Phone”
icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto™.
Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel,
or press and hold the Microphone icon within
Android Auto™, to activate Android’s™ VR, which
recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of
your smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 6.0 or higher and download app on
Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™, and
Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
APPLE CARPLAY® — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier
and mobile phone manufacturer. Some
Apple CarPlay® features may or may not be
available in every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone to
project your iPhone® and many of its apps onto
your Uconnect touchscreen (smartphone’s data
plan will be used for certain apps). Connect your
iPhone® 5 or higher to one of the media USB ports,
using the Apple® factory-provided Lightning cable,
and press the new Apple CarPlay® icon that
replaces your Phone icon on the main menu bar to
begin Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the
VR button on the steering wheel, or press and
hold the Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to
activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice
commands to use certain iPhone’s® features
such as:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps (if equipped)
Additional Apps (if equipped)
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle
user interface is a product of Apple®. Apple
CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc. iPhone® is
a trademark of Apple® Inc., registered in the US
and other countries. Apple® terms of use and
privacy statements apply.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
MULTIMEDIA 287
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUcon-
nect.ca
or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visit www.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian
or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.ca/
guardian-v1/
or call: 1-877-324-9091
9
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder.
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the items
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you
may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily
charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make
these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your
vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you
get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer's authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools,
and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be
resolved with this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk
to the general manager or owner of the autho-
rized dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer's
customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 289
IN MEXICO CONTACT
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 247-9753
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
the manufacturer has installed special TDD
(Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or
speech impaired customer, who has access to
a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in
the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers,
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay
Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar Vehicle
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed
by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection
beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a
Mopar Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive
Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in
the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about the service
contract, call the FCA US LLC’s Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle.
An authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain
its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free
at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 291
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle
Defect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either
the website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features.
They show exactly how to find and correct
problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and
a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific
FCA US LLC vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om
To order a hard copy of your Owner’s Information,
visit:
www.techauthority.com (US)
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
10
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes.........................................254
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control)..............................................152
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............230
Adding Fuel....................................................174
Adding Washing Fluid ....................................220
Additives, Fuel ...............................................256
Adjust
Forward ....................................................... 30
Rearward..................................................... 30
Air Bag ...........................................................115
Advance Front Air Bag...............................115
Air Bag Operation ......................................117
Air Bag Warning Light................................115
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................117
Enhanced Accident Response......... 121, 213
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................213
Front Air Bag .............................................115
If Deployment Occurs................................120
Knee Impact Bolsters................................117
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............121
Maintenance .............................................121
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............115
Side Air Bags .............................................117
Transporting Pets......................................133
Air Bag Light.................................. 80, 115, 134
Air Cleaner, Engine
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ............................. 223
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 223
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 223, 224
Air Conditioner System ...........................47, 223
Air Conditioning Filter..............................53, 224
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips.......................52
Air Filter ........................................................ 223
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................... 242
Alarm
Arm The System ...................................21, 22
Panic ...........................................................13
Rearm The System ......................................22
Security Alarm ......................................21, 83
Alarm System
Security Alarm .............................................21
All Wheel Drive
Towing ...................................................... 213
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ................................... 233
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle........................................................... 9
Android Auto ................................................. 286
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 229, 259
Disposal ................................................... 230
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)..........................90
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...................................85
Apple CarPlay................................................ 286
Arming System
Security Alarm .............................................21
Assist, Hill Start................................................95
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 262
Auto Down Power Windows..............................54
Auto Up Power Windows ..................................54
Automatic Door Locks......................................26
Automatic Headlights.......................................42
Automatic High Beams.....................................41
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)..............52
Automatic Transmission................................ 143
Adding Fluid............................233, 260, 261
Fluid And Filter Change............................. 233
Fluid Change............................................. 233
Fluid Level Check.............................232, 233
Fluid Type ...............................232, 260, 261
Special Additives ...................................... 233
Automatic Transmission Limp Home
Mode...................................................... 26, 147
Autostick
Operation.................................................. 147
AUX Cord ....................................................... 280
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........70
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
293
AWD
Towing.......................................................213
Axle Fluid ............................................. 260, 261
Axle Lubrication ................................... 260, 261
B
Back-Up .........................................................173
Battery....................................................81, 220
Charging System Light................................. 81
Keyless Key Fob Replacement.................... 13
Location ....................................................220
Belts, Seat .....................................................134
Beverage Holder Cooled (Cupholder) .............. 69
Beverage Holder Heated (Cupholder) .............. 69
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................226
B-Pillar Location.............................................238
Brake Assist System ........................................ 91
Brake Control System ...................................... 91
Brake Fluid ................................. 231, 260, 261
Brake System ...................................... 231, 254
Fluid Check ............................ 231, 260, 261
Master Cylinder .........................................231
Parking......................................................140
Warning Light .....................................80, 254
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................143
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle.....140
Brightness, Interior Lights................................ 45
Bulb Replacement.........................................191
Bulbs, Light.......................................... 136, 191
C
Camera, Rear................................................ 173
Capacities, Fluid ........................................... 259
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ...................................... 218, 222
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 230
Car Washes................................................... 252
Carbon Monoxide Warning................... 134, 258
Cargo
Vehicle Loading ........................................ 176
Cargo Area Cover .............................................60
Cargo Compartment ........................................60
Cellular Phone .............................................. 281
Certification Label......................................... 176
Chains, Tire................................................... 249
Changing A Flat Tire...................................... 233
Chart, Tire Sizing........................................... 235
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light)............................89
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 133
Checks, Safety .............................................. 133
Child Restraint .............................................. 122
Child Restraints
Booster Seats........................................... 125
Child Seat Installation .............................. 131
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 129
Infant And Child Restraints....................... 124
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children.. 126
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 124
Seating Positions...................................... 126
Child Safety Locks............................................26
Clean Air Gasoline......................................... 256
Cleaning
Wheels...................................................... 248
Climate Control ................................................47
Automatic ....................................................47
Coin Holder ......................................................67
Cold Weather Operation................................ 139
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 246
Console
Floor ............................................................67
Contract, Service........................................... 289
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 230
Cooling System ............................................. 229
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 230
Coolant Capacity....................................... 259
Coolant Level...................................229, 231
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 230
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 229
Inspection................................................. 231
Points To Remember ................................ 231
Pressure Cap ............................................ 230
Radiator Cap............................................. 230
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze).........................229, 259, 260
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 251
Cruise Control (Speed Control)............. 150, 152
Cruise Light...............................................86, 87
11
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294
Cupholders ...................................................... 68
Customer Assistance .....................................288
Cybersecurity.................................................262
D
Daytime Running Lights...................................41
Dealer Service ...............................................221
Deck Lid
Power Release ............................................58
Defroster, Windshield....................................135
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers.............................. 46
Diagnostic System, Onboard ........................... 88
Dimmer Switch
Headlight..................................................... 41
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine)................................................220
Disable Vehicle Towing..................................212
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant).......................230
Disturb...........................................................285
Door Ajar.......................................................... 81
Door Ajar Light................................................. 81
Door Locks
Automatic.................................................... 26
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors.... 26
Doors............................................................... 22
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 28
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising,
Or Shallow Standing Water ...................184
E
Electric Brake Control System..........................91
Anti-Lock Brake System...............................90
Electronic Roll Mitigation......................92, 97
Electric Remote Mirrors ...................................38
Electronic Power Distribution
Center (Fuses) .............................................. 195
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control)..... 150
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .....................92
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light.........81
Emergency Gas Can Refueling...................... 209
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck..................... 211
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 186
Jacking ............................................ 202, 233
Jump Starting ........................................... 207
Towing ...................................................... 212
Emission Control System Maintenance ...........89
Engine.................................................. 218, 219
Air Cleaner................................................ 223
Block Heater............................................. 140
Break-In Recommendations..................... 140
Checking Oil Level .................................... 220
Compartment .................................. 218, 219
Compartment Identification...................... 218
Coolant (Antifreeze)......................... 229, 260
Cooling ..................................................... 229
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................... 134, 258
Fails To Start ............................................ 139
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 139
Fuel Requirements ................................... 255
Jump Starting ........................................... 207
Oil ...........................................221, 259, 260
Oil Filler Cap .................................... 218, 222
Oil Filter .................................................... 223
Oil Selection.....................................222, 259
Oil Synthetic.............................................. 222
Overheating .............................................. 209
Starting..................................................... 137
Engine Oil Viscosity ....................................... 222
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart.............................. 222
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature ................................................ 121, 213
Ethanol.......................................................... 256
Exhaust Gas Cautions..........................134, 258
Exhaust System ................................... 134, 227
Exterior Lighting ...............................................40
Exterior Lights ........................................ 40, 136
F
Filters
Air Cleaner ................................................ 223
Air Conditioning ................................. 53, 224
Engine Oil ........................................ 223, 260
Engine Oil Disposal................................... 223
Flashers ........................................................ 186
Hazard Warning ........................................ 186
Turn Signals................................ 43, 87, 136
Flash-To-Pass...................................................41
Flooded Engine Starting................................ 139
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
295
Floor Console................................................... 67
Fluid Capacities .............................................259
Fluid Leaks ....................................................136
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ........................................................231
Cooling System..........................................229
Engine Oil ..................................................220
Transfer Case............................................233
Fluid, Brake ......................................... 260, 261
Fluids And Lubricants ....................................260
Fog Lights ........................................................ 43
Fold-Flat Seats................................................. 28
Folding Rear Seats .......................................... 28
Forward Collision Warning.............................101
Four-Way Hazard Flasher...............................186
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................211
Fuel ...............................................................255
Additives ...................................................256
Clean Air....................................................256
Ethanol......................................................256
Gasoline ....................................................255
Gauge.......................................................... 85
Materials Added........................................256
Methanol...................................................256
Octane Rating ........................ 255, 256, 260
Requirements ...........................................255
Specifications............................................260
Tank Capacity............................................259
Fuses.............................................................195
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink).....................62
Gasoline, Clean Air........................................ 256
Gasoline, Reformulated................................ 256
Gauges
Fuel .............................................................85
Gear Ranges................................................. 145
Glass Cleaning.............................................. 253
Gross Axle Weight Rating ..................... 176, 177
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating................ 176, 177
GVWR............................................................ 176
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising,
Or Shallow Standing Water .................. 184
Hazard Warning Flashers.............................. 186
Head Restraints........................................33, 34
Head Rests ...............................................33, 34
Headlights .................................................... 193
Automatic ....................................................42
Cleaning ................................................... 251
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........41
Lights On Reminder.....................................42
On With Wipers............................................42
Passing........................................................41
Switch..........................................................40
Time Delay...................................................42
Washers ................................................... 220
Heated Mirrors.................................................39
Heater, Engine Block..................................... 140
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch ..............................................................41
Hill Start Assist.................................................95
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................................... 179
Holder, Coin .....................................................67
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................62
Hood Prop ........................................................58
Hood Release...................................................58
I
Ignition.............................................................15
Switch..........................................................15
In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide ......................................10
Inside Rearview Mirror ........................... 37, 186
Instrument Cluster ....................................72, 74
Descriptions.................................................87
Display..................................................74, 76
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 253
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 252
Interior Lights...................................................43
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................46
Introduction .......................................................8
11
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296
J
Jack Location.................................................202
Jack Operation..................................... 204, 233
Jacking Instructions.......................................204
Jump Starting ................................................207
K
Key Fob
Arm The System .......................................... 21
Panic Alarm ................................................. 13
Programming Additional Key Fobs ....... 15, 20
Unlatch The Trunk ....................................... 12
Key Fob Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ................................... 13
Key Fob Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ................................... 15
Key-In Reminder.............................................. 17
Keyless Enter-N-Go.................................23, 137
Enter The Trunk........................................... 12
Passive Entry............................................... 23
Passive Entry Programming......................... 23
Keys................................................................. 11
Replacement........................................ 15, 20
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals........................ 43
Lane Change Assist ......................................... 43
LaneSense ....................................................170
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................................109
Latches......................................................... 136
Hood............................................................58
Lead Free Gasoline....................................... 255
Leaks, Fluid .................................................. 136
Life Of Tires................................................... 244
Light Bulbs........................................... 136, 191
Lights............................................................ 136
Air Bag...................................... 80, 115, 134
Automatic Headlights ..................................42
Brake Assist Warning ..................................94
Brake Warning....................................80, 254
Bulb Replacement.................................... 191
Cruise ...................................................86, 87
Daytime Running.........................................41
Dimmer Switch, Headlight.................... 40, 41
Engine Temperature Warning......................82
Exterior ..................................................... 136
Fog ..............................................................43
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 186
Headlight Switch..........................................40
Headlights ...................................40, 42, 193
Headlights On With Wipers..........................42
High Beam...................................................41
High Beam/Low Beam Select......................41
Instrument Cluster.......................................40
Intensity Control ..........................................45
Interior.........................................................43
License..................................................... 194
Lights On Reminder.....................................42
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)..........83
Map .............................................................44
Park ......................................................42, 87
Passing ........................................................41
Reading .......................................................44
Seat Belt Reminder .....................................82
Security Alarm .............................................83
Service...................................................... 191
Traction Control ...........................................94
Turn Signals......................... 40, 43, 87, 136
Vanity Mirror ................................................39
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions .....................................82, 87
Load Leveling System ......................................62
Load Shed Battery Saver On ............................79
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ..............79
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor...............79
Loading Vehicle.................................... 176, 177
Capacities................................................. 177
Tires.......................................................... 238
Locks
Auto Unlock .................................................26
Automatic Door............................................26
Child Protection ...........................................26
Power Door ..................................................23
Low Tire Pressure System............................. 103
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 226
Lug Nuts........................................................ 254
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
297
M
Maintenance Free Battery .............................220
Maintenance Schedule........................ 214, 215
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine) ......................................... 83, 89
Manual
Park Release.............................................210
Service ......................................................291
Media Hub.....................................................280
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ....................28
Memory Seat ................................................... 28
Memory Seats And Radio ................................ 28
Methanol .......................................................256
Mirrors............................................................. 37
Electric Powered ......................................... 38
Electric Remote........................................... 38
Heated ........................................................ 39
Outside........................................................ 37
Rearview ............................................37, 186
Vanity .......................................................... 39
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle .......................................................... 9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.......................103
Mopar Parts...................................................290
MP3 Control ..................................................280
Multi-Function Control Lever............................ 40
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period..........................140
O
Occupant Restraints ..................................... 107
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ...255, 256, 260
Oil Change Indicator ........................................76
Reset...........................................................76
Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 223
Oil Filter, Selection........................................ 223
Oil Pressure Light.............................................82
Oil, Engine............................................ 221, 260
Capacity.................................................... 259
Change Interval ........................................ 221
Checking................................................... 220
Dipstick .................................................... 220
Disposal ................................................... 223
Filter ................................................ 223, 260
Filter Disposal........................................... 223
Identification Logo.................................... 222
Materials Added To .................................. 223
Pressure Warning Light ...............................82
Recommendation............................ 222, 259
Synthetic .................................................. 222
Viscosity .......................................... 222, 259
Onboard Diagnostic System.............................88
Operating Precautions .....................................88
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual....................................9, 291
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................37
Overheating, Engine...................................... 209
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual)................... 9
P
Paddle Shift Mode ........................................ 147
Paddle Shifters ............................................. 147
Paint Care ..................................................... 251
Panic Alarm......................................................13
Parking Brake ............................................... 140
ParkSense System, Rear............................... 164
Passive Entry....................................................23
Pets............................................................... 133
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 238
Power
Brakes ...................................................... 254
Deck Lid Release.........................................58
Distribution Center (Fuses)....................... 198
Door Locks...................................................23
Mirrors .........................................................38
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet).................70
Seats ...........................................................29
Steering .................................................... 149
Sunroof........................................................55
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column................35
Windows ......................................................53
Power Seats
Forward .......................................................30
Lumbar ........................................................31
Rearward .....................................................30
Recline.........................................................30
Power Steering Fluid ..................................... 260
11
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts...................113
Preparation For Jacking.................................203
Pretensioners
Seat Belts..................................................113
R
Radial Ply Tires ..............................................243
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............230
Radio Operation ............................................281
Rain Sensitive Wiper System........................... 46
Rear Axle (Differential)...................................233
Rear Camera .................................................173
Rear Cross Path............................................... 99
Rear ParkSense System ................................164
Rear Seats, Folding ......................................... 28
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
Towing.......................................................213
Recreational Towing ......................................183
Reformulated Gasoline..................................256
Refrigerant ....................................................224
Release, Hood ................................................. 58
Reminder, Lights On........................................ 42
Reminder, Seat Belt ......................................108
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm............................................. 21
Panic Alarm ................................................. 13
Programming Additional Key Fobs ....... 15, 20
Unlatch The Trunk ....................................... 12
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ..............................18
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features..................................................19
Uconnect Settings .......................................19
Remote Trunk Release ....................................58
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 191
Replacement Keys....................................15, 20
Replacement Tires........................................ 245
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 290
Restraints, Child ........................................... 122
Restraints, Head.......................................33, 34
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ........................ 211
Rotation, Tires .............................................. 249
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 134
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................... 136
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 290
Safety Information, Tire ................................ 234
Safety Tips .................................................... 133
Safety, Exhaust Gas...................................... 134
Schedule, Maintenance....................... 214, 215
Seat Belt Reminder..........................................82
Seat Belts ............................................ 108, 134
Adjustable Shoulder Belt.......................... 112
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage..... 112
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage............................................ 112
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 113
Child Restraints ........................................ 122
Energy Management Feature ................... 113
Extender ................................................... 112
Front Seat...............................108, 109, 111
Inspection................................................. 134
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................... 111
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................... 111
Lap/Shoulder Belts................................... 109
Operating Instructions .............................. 111
Pregnant Women...................................... 113
Pretensioners ........................................... 113
Rear Seat.................................................. 109
Reminder.................................................. 108
Seat Belt Extender.................................... 112
Seat Belt Pretensioner.............................. 113
Untwisting Procedure................................ 111
Seat Belts Maintenance................................ 252
Seats..................................................28, 30, 31
Adjustment ...........................................28, 30
Easy Entry....................................................31
Head Restraints....................................33, 34
Heated.........................................................31
Height Adjustment .......................................29
Power...........................................................29
Rear Folding ................................................28
Seatback Release........................................28
Tilting....................................................28, 29
Vented .........................................................33
Ventilated ....................................................33
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
299
Security Alarm .......................................... 21, 83
Arm The System .......................................... 21
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)...................260
Sentry Key
Key Programming........................................ 20
Sentry Key (Immobilizer).................................. 20
Sentry Key Replacement .......................... 15, 20
Service Assistance.........................................288
Service Contract ............................................289
Service Manuals............................................291
Shifting ..........................................................142
Automatic Transmission.................. 142, 143
Shoulder Belts...............................................109
Side View Mirror Adjustment ........................... 37
Signals, Turn....................................43, 87, 136
Siri .................................................................285
Snow Chains (Tire Chains).............................249
Snow Tires.....................................................246
Spare Tires ................................. 202, 246, 247
Spark Plugs ...................................................260
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ..........................................260
Oil..............................................................260
Speed Control
Accel/Decel...............................................151
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) .............................155
Cancel .......................................................152
Resume.....................................................151
Set.............................................................150
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ............ 150, 152
Sport Mode................................................... 149
Starting ......................................................... 137
Automatic Transmission ........................... 137
Button .........................................................15
Cold Weather............................................ 139
Engine Fails To Start................................. 139
Starting And Operating.................................. 137
Starting Procedures...................................... 137
Steering ...........................................................35
Column Lock................................................35
Power ....................................................... 149
Tilt Column ..................................................35
Wheel, Heated.............................................36
Wheel, Tilt....................................................35
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..................... 280
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ........................................................ 280
Storage ......................................................... 251
Storage, Vehicle......................................52, 251
Storing Your Vehicle...................................... 251
Stuck, Freeing............................................... 211
Sun Roof..........................................................55
Sunglasses Storage .........................................71
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .... 115
Synthetic Engine Oil...................................... 222
T
Telescoping Steering Column...........................35
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC).............52
Tilt Steering Column.........................................35
Time Delay
Headlight .....................................................42
Tire And Loading Information Placard........... 238
Tire Markings ................................................ 234
Tire Safety Information.................................. 234
Tires .................................. 136, 242, 246, 250
Aging (Life Of Tires)................................... 244
Air Pressure .............................................. 242
Chains ...................................................... 249
Changing ...................... 202, 204, 206, 233
Compact Spare......................................... 246
Flat Changing............................................ 206
General Information ........................ 242, 246
High Speed ............................................... 243
Inflation Pressure ..................................... 242
Jacking............................................. 204, 233
Life Of Tires .............................................. 244
Load Capacity ..................................238, 239
Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) .............................. 84, 103
Quality Grading ......................................... 250
Radial ....................................................... 243
Replacement ...................................206, 245
11
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300
Rotation ....................................................249
Safety.............................................. 234, 242
Sizes..........................................................235
Snow Tires.................................................246
Spare Tires............................. 202, 246, 247
Spinning ....................................................244
Trailer Towing............................................181
Tread Wear Indicators...............................244
Wheel Mounting ........................................206
Wheel Nut Torque .....................................254
To Open Hood.................................................. 58
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .......................180
Towing ...........................................................177
Behind A Motorhome ................................183
Disabled Vehicle........................................212
Guide.........................................................179
Recreational..............................................183
Weight.......................................................179
Towing Behind A Motorhome.........................183
Traction ............................................... 183, 184
Traction Control ...............................................97
Trailer Towing ............................................... 177
Cooling System Tips ................................. 183
Hitches ..................................................... 179
Minimum Requirements........................... 180
Tips........................................................... 182
Trailer And Tongue Weight........................ 180
Wiring ....................................................... 181
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 179
Trailer Weight................................................ 179
Transfer Case
Fluid .......................................233, 260, 261
Maintenance ............................................ 233
Transmission ................................................ 143
Automatic ........................................ 143, 232
Fluid ................................................ 260, 261
Maintenance ............................................ 232
Shifting ..................................................... 142
Transporting Pets.......................................... 133
Tread Wear Indicators .................................. 244
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) .........................................58
Trunk Release Remote Control ........................58
Turn Signals ..............................................43, 87
U
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings ............... 12, 13, 19, 263
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With
8.4-Inch Display ............................................ 263
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable
Features ................................. 19, 23, 263
Passive Entry Programming.........................23
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 250
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....62
Universal Transmitter.......................................62
Unleaded Gasoline........................................ 255
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt.................... 111
USB............................................................... 280
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
301
V
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................39
Vehicle Certification Label .............................176
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...............254
Vehicle Loading .......................... 176, 177, 239
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations...................... 9
Vehicle Security Alarm..................................... 21
Vehicle Storage ......................................52, 251
Vehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help ............................................ 10
Navigation ................................................... 10
Operating Instructions................................. 10
Searching User Guide.................................. 10
Viscosity, Engine Oil.......................................222
Voice Command ............................................282
Voice Recognition System (VR) ......................282
W
Warning Flashers, Hazard............................. 186
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)....................................................84
Warnings And Cautions...................................... 9
Warranty Information.................................... 290
Washer
Adding Fluid.............................................. 220
Washers, Windshield ..............................46, 220
Washing Vehicle ........................................... 252
Water
Driving Through ........................................ 184
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .......................... 248
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim........................... 248
Wind Buffeting ..........................................55, 56
Window Fogging...............................................52
Windows ..........................................................53
Power...........................................................53
Reset Auto-Up..............................................54
Windshield Defroster .................................... 135
Windshield Washers .................................45, 46
Fluid.......................................................... 220
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 226
Windshield Wipers ...........................................45
Wipers Blade Replacement........................... 226
Wipers, Intermittent .........................................46
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................46
11
20_LX_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal
injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any
electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and
could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your
full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting
while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source
for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your
local Chrysler brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment
is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under
license. Chrysler est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc., utilisée sous le permis. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple
Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
_LX_OM_EN_USC
First Edition V
owners.mopar.ca
U. S. Canada
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter
the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
mopar.com/om
